Opportunities

View All & Sort By:

Environmental/Geo/Agriculture (7)

  • Green Energy with KC Based Solar Power Business

    They have over $3MM in backlog projects expected to be completed in 2023. Established in 2011 this business has a well-established crew consisting of 6 core employees: 1 project manager, 1 project coordinator/client liaison, 2 business development associates, 1 sales manager, and 1 outside sales rep. This solar energy business sells solar power equipment and coordinates installation, they do not self-perform any installation labor. In August of 2022, the Senate passed a bill that would provide major tax credits for renewable energy which would directly benefit the new owner. Additionally, the continued push for green energy will call for organic growth in this industry. This business solely focuses on Solar Power Equipment Sales and Coordination of Installation with no labor or self-preformed installation. Due to their business model, they can work with commercial businesses, industrial municipalities, agricultural farms, nonprofit organizations, and schools. With very low equipment CapEx while allowing them to operate in Missouri, Iowa, Kansas, and Illinois with the potential for regional expansion with emphasis on municipal contracts.

    The current owner actively operates the company, including financial management and some business development but has offered to stay with the company for 2-3 years in order to provide a smooth transition/training period. The current owner is looking to sell this business in order to plan for retirement and is willing to carry 25% of the purchase in order to show good faith in the continued success of this company. Priced at $7,800,000 this business has a great outlook when it comes to scalability as well as vertical growth! A new owner will have everything needed to allow this business to continue to succeed including a diverse client base, a reliable staff, a passionate owner ready to offer years of experience, and continual organic and driven growth opportunities.

    PRICE $7,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,670,114

  • Most Well Run Soft and Hard Landscaping Business with $10M in Revenue

     

    This company is stacked with 3 Divisional Managers, an entire administrative staff plus 20 crews consisting of 50 skilled laborers. This is not your typical landscape “Mom and Pop” type of business! The company has $4.7M in assets which makes the buyers bank loan 100% collateralized! They have 5 years of year-over-year growth and the trailing twelve months of sales is over 10 million with 3 million in committed contracts for 2023. Their hardscape services consisting of retaining walls & pavers makes up 40% of their revenue. The pool division is 35% which includes pool design, landscape and water features. The remaining 25% is in reoccurring weekly maintenance for HOA’s, and both residential and commercial clients. This division has 800+ high-end residential homeowners on their list and boasts a 98% retention rate! After more than 20 years in business unfortunately, the owner is selling to have more time to focus on some health concerns in his family. He has offered a transition period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transfer of ownership for both the buyer and his staff.

     

    The current owner has offered to carry or roll equity for up to 20% of this purchase to establish his ongoing vested interest in the success of the business and as a show of good faith. All of the certifications needed (licensed contractor, sprinkler contractors, lawn and paving certifications) are held by the business or current employees, not the owner. Priced at $6,800,000 this business has a solid team, client base, and local reputation that any entrepreneur could build with. There is absolutely no marketing in place, all business is based on reputation, and they also have much more capacity with their current location and fleet.

     

    PRICE $6,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,691,487

  • Upstate New York Environmental Services

     

    This upstate New York company provides environmental services regionally and has generally low inventory, as everything needed is purchase based on the job at hand.  This company provides asbestos removal, lead remediation, and fireproofing services.  They are consistently seeing year over year growth and hit over $8M in revenue in 2021!  They have been established in upstate New York since 2012.

     

    Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant. 

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Priced at $898,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $147,250 in the first year after debt payments – a 131% return on investment! Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

    PRICE $898,000 CASH FLOW $262,089

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • Commercial GC: Primary Clients in School Systems

    Boasting over a 20% increase in year over year revenue, this 15+ established business can be purchased with just $63,000 down. All vehicles, equipment, and assets are included in the $630,000 purchase price. Located in the Denver Metropolitan Area, this General Contractor focuses on municipal projects with over 50% of their income coming from state school systems. Due to the recently passed infrastructure bill, this company is recession proof due to their municipality focus. General Contracting services provided include new builds and foundations, renovations, drywall, electrical system installation, plumbing, and demolition. With a manager and 2 superintendents and an accountant, the majority of work is delegated to subcontractors.

     

    The current owner of this business is looking to retire from his current role of handling the estimating and bid management for the business. Before stepping away from this operation, he is dedicated to ensuring the ongoing success and comfort of both the staff and clients. This is why he has offered a transition period of up to 3 years. As an added demonstration of his vested interest in the ongoing success of the business, he has also offered to carry 10% of the purchase price via either seller financing or equity roll. Priced at $630,000, this general contractor with over 15 years of experience and reputation under their belt is a fantastic opportunity for a wide variety of buyers. This business has exponential room for growth in almost every field as the owner has kept things small out of personal preference. The business could expand in almost every aspect including self-performed labor, client base, geography, marketing tactics, and more making it a potential gold mine waiting to be discovered. It has a wealth of resources that could be found invaluable to an individual looking to step out of their current construction job and build up their own business, an existing contractor looking to expand into the municipal client base, or a subcontractor looking to expand the services they can offer outside of their current niche.

    PRICE $630,000 CASH FLOW $174,907

  • Corporate Interiors: Architecture, Design, Procurement

    Established in 1989, this architecture and design firm serves New England, the Middle East and the Caribbean. The firm’s work is recognizable from Times Square to Saudi Arabia, and they’ve built a high reputation world-wide. Located in Boston, MA. this firm focuses on interior architecture with commercial clients and has more than 220 condo, hotels & restaurant projects under its belt. Although they mostly focus on condos and hospitality; they are also able to take on diverse projects in the commercial and industrial field. This Business has an established team consisting of 1 Design Director, 1 Senior Designer, 1 Senior CAD Designer, 1 Designer, 1 Purchasing Agent, 1 Junior Designer, 1 Renderer, and 1 Bookkeeper. The Office space has an open design for work, a private conference space, kitchen, bathroom and storage in the basement with a lease of $5,800/Month. The owner does not do any drawing or CAD work but oversees strategy and interfaces with key employees though he has limited client interaction as he is only there three days per week. The current owner is a newlywed, looking to sell this business so he can move out of state in order to live with his wife. There is an opportunity for growth in the business development and marketing side of this business as most of their clients are repeat/existing clients.

    Priced at $990,000, this is a business opportunity with outstanding growth potential. With nearly 2 million in sales and $700,000 in cashflow in 2022, this business is primed for a new owner to step in and reap the benefits of this established firm. The Fair Market Valuation of this business is $1,506,777 with a selling price of $990,000. The current owner has agreed to this discounted rate as the owner recently got married and would like to live closer to his spouse who is out of state. The current owner of this profitable Boston based design and architecture firm is willing to stay on for 2-4 years to help ease transition and is offering to carry 20% of the purchase to show good faith in the future success of this firm.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $699,970

  • Maintenance in Commercial Roofing: Reoccurring

     

    Their client base is made up of 100% commercial clients including consultants, general contractors, private real estate owners, construction managers, and municipalities, 65% of whom are repeat clients. With 95 W2 Employees, this commercial roofing business is able to self-perform 100% of their labor. With $16M already lined up in backlog (committed contracts), they are on target to have the best year ever in 2023, and there is no sign of slowing down in 2023! Their services include reroofing/scheduled replacement (50%), new construction (40%), and general repair & maintenance (10%) and are able to service a wide service area including a 75-mile radius of Akron. The sale of this business includes $5M in assets, including 30+ trucks & trailers, and $2.6M in equipment. This means that new ownership would be able to easily build on current growth opportunities without needing to invest excessive resources to do so. Growth opportunities include going after more maintenance/service work, sheet metal projects, and the recently approved US Infrastructure Bill will also provide growth across the municipal clients they work with. The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-tomonth basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction. Priced at $14,950,000, this business is primed for new ownership with already long-standing client relationships in place, an excellent reputation, and a strong word of mouth job pipeline. The owners are looking forward to retiring out of state, but the two active owners are more than happy to stay on board post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Owner 1 handles the oversight and management, as well as review of estimates and would stay for 1 year, Owner 2 handles the day-to-day operations and would stay for 2 years, and Owner 3 (absentee) does not need replacing. They would be willing to retain equity or carry a note for 15%, showing their vested interest in the ongoing success on the company.

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $2,592,337

  • Engineering Firm: Structural – Owner to stay 3 years.

     

    With over 90% repeat clients, this firm caters to a client base which is primarily located in Oklahoma. However, those companies have multiple locations throughout the United States and due to their long-term relationships, the firm handles work for many of those projects. This Business has a client base that is 100% commercial: with their work including institutional buildings, warehouses, retail shopping centers, schools, gymnasiums, churches, and retirement & nursing homes. This steady client base has allowed the firm to reach a profit margin of 49% in 2021. This Structural Engineering team consists of 3 Engineers, 1 CAD technician; 5-6 drafters, and the owner who handles oversight and final approval of plans. With the qualifications that the staff holds, they can offer any service surrounding the scope of structural engineering. The current owner handles general oversight and gives the final approval on proposed plans. The owner has offered a 3-year training period to assist with a smooth transition of ownership. In addition to this, the owner has offered 15% seller financing or equity roll of the purchase to show good faith in the continued success of the business moving forward.

     

    The company utilizes 2,600 square feet of space in a local office building fitted with private offices, an open work area, and a conference room with space for expansion. 

     

    Priced at $1,390,000 a 10% down payment of $139,000 returns $280,161 in the first year after debt payments, this a return-on-investment rate of 201%! The current owner has agreed to stay on for three years and carry 15% of the business after purchase to show just how much faith he has in the business and in the new owner’s opportunities to continue and grow.

     

    PRICE $1,390,000 CASH FLOW $491,205

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Toronto Multi-Service Engineering Firm – 31% Profit Margin

    With over $4.6M in sales and a 31% profit margin in 2020, this Toronto-based engineering consulting firm has seen steady growth over the years. With solid long-term relationships established with their clients throughout Canada, they offer a variety of services including geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, noise & vibration monitoring, geotechnical engineering & material testing, building design, environmental engineering, civil engineering design & planning, hydrogeological engineering, Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) scanning services, noise impact studying, and construction dust monitoring.  Taking on large, long-term projects for transit authorities, governmental organizations, and general contractors, this company has wide-ranging capabilities creating a consolidated resource for customers to meet their project goals. A focus of the company is on transit systems including tunneling, subway, rail and subway stations, bridges, sewer and water infrastructure, and highways. Their 50 personnel includes professional engineers, architects, subject matter experts, software engineers, surveyors, accounting, and administration.

    The owner of this business currently oversees operations and is a reliable and very knowledgeable resource for employees. The owner manages the strong growth trajectory and supports positive client relationships.  To continue revenue growth, one could consider offering commissions to the sales team to boost external relationships networking and earning additional contracts.  

    Operations are managed from the 10,000 square foot headquarters located in the Greater Toronto Area. The company has over 15 years of experience serving Canada, and has expanded its business to Trinidad, Tobago, Turkey, China, and the United States.

    PRICE $8,400,000 CASH FLOW $1,420,321

  • Architecture Firm with 20 years’ Experience – Wants a Strategic Buyer

    Having been established for over 20 years, this Toronto based Architecture firm has an extremely experienced and educated team of 4 architects and 3 architectural technologists. This Fullservice Architecture firm specializes in mid to high-rise residential condominiums and Industrial Buildings. With this well-established team they are able to design the project from start to finish including the foundation of the project to the interior of the completed building. The team has an excellent reputation in the Toronto area which has allowed them to increase their 2022 revenue to $1 million with an average profit margin of 25%. The office is currently operating out of a 2,500 sq. foot space which helps keep overhead costs low while effectively offering their services to local developers, engineers, and general contractors. The owner of this full-service architecture firm is looking to merge with a new partner in the industry. To this end, he has offered to stay with the business for 5 years after purchase and is willing to offer 15% equity roll and 10% vendor take back making a combined 25% carry even though the industry average is 10%. The current owner asks that the buyer already be the owner of an architecture firm as he is looking for a partner to further the business through effective and targeted marketing in the future.

    Priced at $1,015,000, this is an incredible opportunity for a new owner to step in and focus on recruiting and business development, while partnering with the current owner to expand. Most clients are obtained through word-of-mouth referrals and are often repeat clients, proving this firm’s commitment to listening and working collaboratively with their clients throughout the projects. This partnership will result in more work being sought after and more projects brought into the fold, giving great potential for increased revenue and business expansion.

    PRICE $1,015,000 CASH FLOW $217,376

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Painting Contractor with 85% Reccurring Clients

    This New York based industrial painting company receives approximately 40 projects a year in municipal infrastructure! Boasting an experienced team of over 90 employees, including 3 project managers, 8 foremen, more than 75 painters and 6 administrative employees, 15 years of quality work has resulted in strong relationships with general contractors and a competitive bidding process that brings in $500K - $1M per project. Included in the purchase is a current backlog of $73M and $2.8M of assets, which includes safety equipment, rigging, and supplies, plus $680K in trucks and trailers. The company’s services include industrial painting and site preparation for jobs such as bridges, tunnels, and transit stations. The company also offers lead abatement and shield integration, services which keep workflow high during the winter months. Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings. Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to stay on for 20 hours a week during an 18 month transition period. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing.  The sellers are willing to roll equity for 12.5% of the purchase price, then do a seller carry for another 12.5% for a total of 25%, as a sign of good faith in the business.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,213,361

Manufacturing/Fabrication (13)

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Trademarked Online Retail Business with Wholesale Partnerships

    This unique novelty retail business has over 1,500 established wholesale client partnerships! They carry a niche bathroom product focusing on molecularly battling unsavory smells leaving behind only the pleasant and masculine smell of a customer’s choosing. Finally, a trademarked brand focused on offering the guys an option they can be comfortable with. Obviously, the market was craving such an option as they have quickly wracked up business partners offering their product on shelves. There are currently three owners. All of these owners have full-time careers and consider this their “hobby” business. A new owner could easily run this business in less than 10 hours per week as they outsource production and only handle fulfillment. This business finds new clients and customers primarily via tradeshows and their website, where individual consumers can place an order. This business would offer a current male consumer focused enterprise an opportunity to expand products with a well-known brand and range of smells. It would also offer an individual owner the opportunity to run a part-time business with huge growth opportunities and the chance to unironically call your job crappy.

     

    While this business has excellent “mom and pop shop” representation across the United States, there are still multiple growth opportunities for new ownership. One would be focusing on stepping into the big box store realm, specifically focusing on gift shops and home good stores. Another could include expanding on current trade show schedules or building on existing partnerships to increase the wholesale side of business.

     

    This relocatable business, outsources all of its product manufacturing. This means that new ownership could be located anywhere and continue this business’s reputation for unique and manly products saving guys from choking on noxious bathroom gases and overbearingly floral facilities one fart joke at a time.

    PRICE $98,000

  • Pipe Fitting & Plumbing for Commercial Clients

     

    Based in Detroit, Michigan, this well-established business is centrally located between Ann Arbor, Flint, Detroit, and Toledo. The company comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 field technicians, 2 estimators, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 admin. This business has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers in a variety of industries including the industrial sector, the healthcare field, and municipal clients. Services that are offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipefitting (25% of service base). The master plumbing license is not held by current ownership but instead is held by one of the team members. This business is for sale at an extremely low multiple of 2.95 times the cash flow! This is because the current owner is looking for a strategic partner to grow the business further and is planning to stay on with the business for 2-3 years to assist in this anticipated growth and ensure a smooth transition. This plumbing and piping business is primed for new ownership, with the projected $1,000,000 in backlog and $600,000 of new projects in their pipeline to be bid on. The current owner is active in the business overseeing estimates and visiting job sites once a week.

     

    The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, with the remaining space dedicated to the office for $2,250 per month. There is plenty of room to expand operations both in the amount of space currently leased and in the opportunities that a buyer could easily take advantage of to see an ongoing development. With their exponentially high rate of return clients, an added marketing or advertising campaign could be expected to result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A well-planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path of growth.

     

    Priced at $1,025,000 the purchase of this company includes all the assets that new ownership will need to continue and grow the current business operation. This includes vehicles, equipment, tools, trailer, and a working capital of $247,709 which, altogether, add up to be valued at $588,297.

     

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • South-East Michigan Piping Company

    This South-East Michigan Piping Company presents a huge opportunity for a strategic owner. With an excellent reputation and $1M in backlog for 2022, as well as huge growth opportunities in marketing and hiring, this business is extremely rewarding for the ambitious owner. The seller is looking to stay on for 2-3 years to help set the business up for great success in the face of growing competition.

     

    The company boasts a team known for quality, punctual work delivered with a personal touch. With 25% of their work in pipe-fitting and 75% in plumbing, including both reworking existing pluming and installing new, this company has earned their high reputation and enjoys a strong base of repeat clientele due to the quality and timeliness of their work.

     

    Situated in a growing industry in a strong location, clear growth opportunities present the strategic owner a route to great rewards in the face of growing competition. The current owner only does cold calls when they have time, and a marketing campaign can elevate this business to an even larger client base, which will then be subject to a high repeat client percentage. A well planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path to growth.

     

    The team works out of  5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, and 1,500 sq. ft. to the office. There is plenty of room to expand operations and bring in more laborers. Servicing clients throughout the South-East Michigan area, this business returns $150,124 in the first year after debt payments, with a 10% down payment of $130,000.

    PRICE $1,300,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Clothing & Apparel Importing – 3 International Manufacturers

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million for 2022. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 12.5% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 12.5%, new owners can anticipate a 203% return on investment in the first year!

     

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

     

    With a price of $2,950,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $1,197,641

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Glazing Contractor with 35k sq. ft. Factory & $7.5M in Backlog

    There is amazing growth potential for a new owner of this OKC Glazing Contractor; expanding services into Texas, Arkansas, Kansas, and Missouri would give a huge revenue boost! With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this company has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the business has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,020,000, the factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place for this business. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $252,500 returns $281,137 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,020,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • $1.5M in Assets at Design, Engineering, and Manufacturing Company

     

    There are over $1.5M in assets at this design, engineering, and manufacturing company! They are well established in the Chicago area but have loyal customers nationwide.  With $1.5M in sales and a 36% profit margin, the company specializes in the design, engineering, and manufacturing of hot runner systems and components for mold making and thermoplastic processing plants. After designing and engineering the custom hot runner system to fit their customers’ plastic injection molding system, they manufacture the system on-site, assuring quality control and reduced cost to their clients. They also have the capability to retrofit existing molds; they can repair or re-configure a system, replace heaters, nozzles, and other components, and they can troubleshoot leaks, heating issues, and flow problems. All of these services contribute to their long-standing client relationships and solid reputation in the market for over 35 years. Their diverse client base consists of mold makers and processing plants for consumer goods in categories such as medical, automotive, cosmetics, caps & closures, consumer electronics, and pet products. Their customers design the product, manufacture it through 3D printing, and gives them the specs; this team then designs the custom hot runner system needed to fit their needs and requirements.

     

    The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner (President/Treasurer), as well as a Design Engineer/Project Manager, 3 Machine Operators, 1 in Assembly, 1 Office Manager, and 1 Financial Officer. The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and team as well as some of the engineering; the Design Engineer/Project Manager handles all design engineering for the hot runner systems and manages each project from beginning to end.

     

    Priced at $2,050,000, this company certainly has the potential to go global!  An existing hot runner system company could take this business to the next level by using the 25 patented products, the team’s experience, and the customers already in place and expanding. A mold maker could also expand their business by purchasing this company, which would complement their services and products.


    PRICE $2,050,000 CASH FLOW $547,161

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Trailer Manufacturing, Painting, & Maintenance

     

    The bank loan would be 100% collateralized from the included business assets with the purchase of this trailer manufacturing, painting & maintenance company. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. The average sale size is $52,500 per trailer; trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Priced at $435,000, opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request.

    PRICE $435,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • HVAC, Sheet Metal Fabrication & Plumbing – Commercial Only

     

    60% collateralized and favorable financing terms! This HVAC and Plumbing company has been serving the Markham, Ontario area for over 15 years! They offer HVAC (50%), plumbing (45%), and refrigeration (5%) services to commercial and industrial customers within a 100-km radius of Markham. Their highly experienced hands-on team is comprised of 6 sheet metal fabricators, 4 plumbers, 5 on the refrigeration/gas crew, 1 administrative assistant, and 1 subcontracted PT bookkeeper.  Assets include 9 vehicles, each equipped with various tools and equipment for the task at hand, and the business has a substantial supply of machinery and equipment, including 7 vacuum pumps, 2 coring machines, 8 torches, various drills & die heads, 3 chop saws, 3 air compressors, a generator, and a backflow prevention kit.

     

    With this business having a services and construction side, they offer an extensive variety of services and projects! This business prides itself on being knowledgeable and well-trained to provide the highest level of technical service on systems such as air conditioning, refrigeration systems, process heating, ventilation systems, water chillers, boilers, and indoor air quality monitoring.

     

    With a solid reputation in place, this business gains clients through an ample number of word-of-mouth referrals. Increasing advertising efforts and creating a social media presence would lead to revenue growth. Hiring staff for management positions (Operations Manager, Service Manager, Chief Estimator, Project Manager) would undoubtedly take the company to the next level.

    PRICE $2,600,000 CASH FLOW $701,779

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

Contracting/Building/Improvements (16)

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • 90-Year-Old Established Appliance Retailer with Install Division

    This business is located in Iowa City and has clients throughout the many small towns within a 50-mile radius of the business. With services including the sales, installation, and servicing of appliances (1/3), HVAC (1/3), and electrical and plumbing (1/3) as well as an excellent local reputation and deep roots within their community, this business has been able to acquire a loyal and somewhat niche client base. There are 8 total staff members including 1 service lead and 2 service techs, 1 install lead and 1 install tech, two office managers, and 1 part-time delivery assistant, allowing the owner of this business to hold down a full-time job completely unrelated to this business for the past five years! The purchase of this business includes $280,000 in assets to allow new ownership to continue the ongoing success of this establishment. This means that not only does a 10% down payment of $49,000 offer new ownership a 172% return on investment with $84,408 being made in the first year after debt payments, but also a significant amount of assets! While there are a few other appliance stores in the area, very few offer installation and maintenance of these products.

     

    This business has ample room for growth in the service side of their industry. Due to their niche maintenance services, partnering with outside appliance sales businesses to offer appliance servicing could offer exponential growth. Not only does a buyer have the opportunity to rent the location this business is in from the current owner, they also have the opportunity to buy it now in a separate transaction, or in the future!

     

    Priced at $490,000, a buyer would be receiving an unmatched reputation as the only business in the area that can offer the customer service and hospitality that can only be offered by a small, Midwest based pillar of their community! The current owner is looking to sell the business in order to change industries and explore other non-competing interests moving forward. He has spent a lot of time building not only this business, but also his community and has extreme vested interest in the ongoing success of the business. As a show of good faith, he has offered 10% seller financing and will stay on board for 6 months-1 year post-close.

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $157,187

  • Sourcing & Location of Materials for Municipal Road Work

    This business sources materials from national manufacturers & vendors, processes submittals for review & approval, releases materials & schedule delivery, and processes & tracks billings in a timely manner. They are a bulk material supplier & procurement company that provides services for municipal job sites where Prime Contractors are performing utility and bridge installations, including ductile/concrete pipe, precast storm drainage & utility structures, cast iron manholes, and inlet frames/covers. The team includes 1 VP, 1 Controller, 1 Estimator, and 2 Administrative Specialists. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. There have been three years of growth in revenue, going from $17 Million in 2020 to $23 Million in 2022! There is over $4.5M in contract receivables, which a buyer would take over on day of close. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the current owner is willing to roll equity and hold a promissory note for up to 20% of the total price. He is also happy to stay on board for 1-2 years post close to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    After building this business and operating in this industry for 20 years, the current owner is ready for a change of pace and is interested in exploring the next chapter of his life. New ownership can expect to step into a stable investment with three locations, including a primary location in Delaware and satellite locations in Georgia and Florida.

     

    Priced at $4,700,000 this business has an established business operation with over $1.1M in assets and enough stability for a new owner to step in and continue operating the business as is.  This opportunity also affords new owners enough flexibility to change things up and try out some new growth routes.  

    PRICE $4,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,275,044

  • K-12 & University Focused Architecture Firm with Multiple Locations

    The current owner of this business is looking to not only stay with the business for five years after sale, but has also offered to carry 25% or more! This architecture firm has a focus on higher education and K-12, with 4.1M in backlog, they are poised for an acquisition. The industry average for seller financing is 10%. This owner is open to a 30% carry showing good faith in the ongoing success and the seller’s vested interest in the success of the business after sale. The firm has nearly 20 years of experience under their belt, and their leadership team has been well mentored. The team consists of 31 employees including 2 SVP’s, 1 CFO, several architects, interior designers, and administrators. Based in New York City, this business has been able to accumulate an excellent reputation spurred on by happy clients which has led to 90% repeat clientele. A strategic new owner with experience in architecture and engineering would have 6 years of seller transitioning of the business and a foot into the New York market.

     

    This business currently only has hospital clients making up roughly 10% of their customer base and with their current team, resources, and connections this would be an excellent opportunity for growth without expending unnecessary resources. 

     

    Priced at $4,300,000 this business is primed to return year over year success to anyone in a related industry. Someone that knows how to operate in this field would be able to not only enjoy the expected organic growth pattern brought forward by the world’s focus on education and building new opportunities, but put forth new growth opportunities without having to utilize exponential resources on accumulating additional assets.

    PRICE $4,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,014,009

  • Install and Maintenance of Public Transportation Systems

     

    Established in 2012, this business has an excellent reputation in their area and currently has 13 contracts, which lands their current working progress total at $28 million. Their team includes 50+ members Including a CFO, VP and Superintendent, 1 Senior Director of Project Managers, 5 Project Managers, 11 Electrical Foreman, 17 electricians and apprentices, railroad maintenance staff, 7 Administrative Employees, equipment operators, and warehouse drivers many of which they hired due to their positive relationship with their union (in this region, the union is the ONLY way to work on public opportunities). They work on rail, streetcar, commuter rail, traffic light, cabling, lighting, and communications systems. Their extensive list of services within their transit niche include designing, drilling, installing, repairing, and maintaining above ground and underground public transportation systems. Due to their heavily municipal focused client base, this infrastructure based electrical company is heavily recession resistant, which is evident in the fact the business even saw growth in 2020! In fact, due to the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will grow significantly as $66B has been set aside for transportation infrastructure work near their Washington and Oregon service area.

     

    The purchase of this business comes with $5.9M in assets including vehicles and equipment, along with working capital of $3M+!  The current owner is looking for a buyer to handle this continual growth as well as to ensure the business is maximizing on its multitude of opportunities.

     

    Priced at $13,950,000, the seller is willing to carry a combined 25% via seller financing and/or equity roll to show good faith in the ongoing success of the company. This establishment, and any potential new ownership, has a new opportunity for focused growth with the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill. There have been multiple infrastructure packages discussed, planned, and/or approved in the area related to public transportation which should be coming to fruition in the near future, creating ongoing opportunities for this business regardless of the status of the economy.

     

    PRICE $13,950,000 CASH FLOW $3,366,766

  • Telecommunications management: Tower Erection and Site Maintenance

    This Dallas based Telecom maintenance and management company has a primary focus on merging networks and overlaying technology into existing structures, which make up 80% of their services. They also handle tower erection, site/tower inspections, electrical services, and compound maintenance and repairs which account for the remaining 20% of revenue. Their current team is made up of 18 skilled employees including 2 project managers, 2 construction managers, 3 crew supervisors along with 3 crews of 3 people, 1 AR manager, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 CPA. They provide service in the northern and western areas of Texas, as well as Oklahoma and Louisiana. The purchase of this business includes over $600,000 of assets. They finalized a signed contract with AT&T December of 2022 – they are conservatively forecasting 2023 Revenue of $6,500,000 with an 18% Net Profit for a cash flow of $1,170,000. The current owner handles general oversight and money management, including approving large purchases and payroll, he works roughly 25 hours per week and is mentoring his VP and Operations Manager. The seller has offered a 1-2-year training/transition period to ensure this process is as smooth as possible for all involved.

     

    This business is working through the stages of signing with Verizon as an active client to begin work in mid-2023. They are also actively working towards a partnership with Verizon. There are less than 10 major carriers within the cell tower industry, meaning there will always be customer concentration in this space.

     

    Priced at $1,750,000 this telecom company is ready for new ownership to step in and continue the excellent reputation that has been curated since 2009. The current owner is invested in the future success of this business and to illustrate this point, has offered 10% of seller financing and 10% equity roll if the buyer desires, this is twice as much as the standard offer. With a long-standing and established client base and pipeline, as well as an excellent and skilled staff, this business is primed to offer new ownership the opportunity for continual ongoing success and reliable income. 

    PRICE $1,750,000 CASH FLOW $540,602

  • Manufacturing of Cast Stone Exteriors – No Installation

     

    This business handles the fabrication of precast stone for masonries and 75% of their work is done for municipal contracts. Due to this extremely stable client base, there will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession. In fact, due to the newly passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business can expect organic growth opportunities in the upcoming year. To add to the stability of this business, they currently have a 90% repeat client base made up of B2B work with the masons being the direct client, not the end user. This operation only handles the manufacturing and fabrication of the cast stone, the do not handle any installation of the products in exterior walls. The services offered include creating a mold and color matching stones for historical buildings that need stones which are no longer available or for eye-catching statement pieces in new locations. Clients that take advantage of these fully customizable stones primarily include museums, commercial locations, and high-end multi-family housing units.

    This Chicago based establishment offers a niche service and, because of this, their nearest competition is 30 miles away. This organization has nearly 20 employees with experts in management including a production manager, plant manager, supply manager; along with 1 drafter, 1 sales rep, 2 mold shop and 12 plant production workers. This team allows the current owner to only work 20-25 hours handling bookkeeping and some deliveries out of personal preference.

    Priced at $2,300,000 this business is ready for a new owner to step in and continue operating on the foundation laid before them. The seller has offered a training period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition of ownership as well as to finance 20% of the purchase price as a show of good faith. With an excellent staff, reputation that’s been established since 2010, and large warehouse with a significant amount of unused space, this niche business is primed to offer a new and excited owner exponential growth opportunity with minimal additional investments needed.

     

    PRICE $2,300,000 CASH FLOW $511,011

  • Pipe Fitting & Plumbing for Commercial Clients

     

    Based in Detroit, Michigan, this well-established business is centrally located between Ann Arbor, Flint, Detroit, and Toledo. The company comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 field technicians, 2 estimators, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 admin. This business has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers in a variety of industries including the industrial sector, the healthcare field, and municipal clients. Services that are offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipefitting (25% of service base). The master plumbing license is not held by current ownership but instead is held by one of the team members. This business is for sale at an extremely low multiple of 2.95 times the cash flow! This is because the current owner is looking for a strategic partner to grow the business further and is planning to stay on with the business for 2-3 years to assist in this anticipated growth and ensure a smooth transition. This plumbing and piping business is primed for new ownership, with the projected $1,000,000 in backlog and $600,000 of new projects in their pipeline to be bid on. The current owner is active in the business overseeing estimates and visiting job sites once a week.

     

    The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, with the remaining space dedicated to the office for $2,250 per month. There is plenty of room to expand operations both in the amount of space currently leased and in the opportunities that a buyer could easily take advantage of to see an ongoing development. With their exponentially high rate of return clients, an added marketing or advertising campaign could be expected to result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A well-planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path of growth.

     

    Priced at $1,025,000 the purchase of this company includes all the assets that new ownership will need to continue and grow the current business operation. This includes vehicles, equipment, tools, trailer, and a working capital of $247,709 which, altogether, add up to be valued at $588,297.

     

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • Green Energy with KC Based Solar Power Business

    They have over $3MM in backlog projects expected to be completed in 2023. Established in 2011 this business has a well-established crew consisting of 6 core employees: 1 project manager, 1 project coordinator/client liaison, 2 business development associates, 1 sales manager, and 1 outside sales rep. This solar energy business sells solar power equipment and coordinates installation, they do not self-perform any installation labor. In August of 2022, the Senate passed a bill that would provide major tax credits for renewable energy which would directly benefit the new owner. Additionally, the continued push for green energy will call for organic growth in this industry. This business solely focuses on Solar Power Equipment Sales and Coordination of Installation with no labor or self-preformed installation. Due to their business model, they can work with commercial businesses, industrial municipalities, agricultural farms, nonprofit organizations, and schools. With very low equipment CapEx while allowing them to operate in Missouri, Iowa, Kansas, and Illinois with the potential for regional expansion with emphasis on municipal contracts.

    The current owner actively operates the company, including financial management and some business development but has offered to stay with the company for 2-3 years in order to provide a smooth transition/training period. The current owner is looking to sell this business in order to plan for retirement and is willing to carry 25% of the purchase in order to show good faith in the continued success of this company. Priced at $7,800,000 this business has a great outlook when it comes to scalability as well as vertical growth! A new owner will have everything needed to allow this business to continue to succeed including a diverse client base, a reliable staff, a passionate owner ready to offer years of experience, and continual organic and driven growth opportunities.

    PRICE $7,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,670,114

  • Environmental Inspections and Sampling – Commercial Clients

     

    Located in Monroe Louisiana, this Environmental inspection and sampling business offers vital services including asbestos abatement (30%), asbestos air monitoring (20%), asbestos inspection (20%), water sampling (20%), mold sampling (5%), and lead inspections (5%). With the abundance of services offered, their commercial clients include banks and schools with some commercial contracts and residential work within municipalities. With a diverse services list and over 40 years of experience, a wide variety of clients are brought on to benefit from the work of the specialist staff. They complete work in three states – Arkansas, Mississippi, and Louisiana. This Mold, Lead and Asbestos Inspection company has the ability to train & license people for asbestos in house, though this has not been heavily pursued and can be seen as a growth opportunity. This company has maintained a 21% profit margin year over year, and included in the sale is over $240k in assets, including several trucks, trailers, an XRF analyzer, and other equipment. While the seller does assist with bidding, the employees on staff are trained to do so as well and can absorb this responsibility with ease. The seller was in and out in 2020 due to a cancer diagnosis (now in remission), and will train and transition a new owner 6 months to 1 year.

    Their location includes an office, 7 total storage facilities, equipment shed, and covered parking area (all at the same location). The seller does own the real estate and is willing to rent it back to the next owner for $2,500/month. This amount has been accounted for and adjusted in the provided cash flow. At a price of $495,000, and a down payment of $49,500, a buyer would expect to see a return of $57,627 in the first year after debt payments!

     

    PRICE $495,000 CASH FLOW $131,149

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Full-Service Stone & Tile Restoration in Phoenix – 1,600+ Clients

    This stone & tile restoration company has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $620,000, a 10% down payment of $62,000 returns $106,494 in the first year after debt payments – a 172% return on investment!

    PRICE $620,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • Painting Contractor with 85% Reccurring Clients

    This New York based industrial painting company receives approximately 40 projects a year in municipal infrastructure! Boasting an experienced team of over 90 employees, including 3 project managers, 8 foremen, more than 75 painters and 6 administrative employees, 15 years of quality work has resulted in strong relationships with general contractors and a competitive bidding process that brings in $500K - $1M per project. Included in the purchase is a current backlog of $73M and $2.8M of assets, which includes safety equipment, rigging, and supplies, plus $680K in trucks and trailers. The company’s services include industrial painting and site preparation for jobs such as bridges, tunnels, and transit stations. The company also offers lead abatement and shield integration, services which keep workflow high during the winter months. Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings. Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to stay on for 20 hours a week during an 18 month transition period. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing.  The sellers are willing to roll equity for 12.5% of the purchase price, then do a seller carry for another 12.5% for a total of 25%, as a sign of good faith in the business.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,213,361

  • Property Maintenance & Repair: 60% Govt. 40% Commercial

    This property maintenance and repair business currently has over $2 million of signed contracts on their work in progress list! Their services include maintenance, renovation & light remodeling, repairs, and rehab work. 60% of their services are utilized by the military, parks department, and United States Fishing & Wildlife Services, while the other 40% of their client base is primarily made up of commercial real estate holding portfolio and multi-unit real estate owners. Located in Houston, TX since 2004, they have a well-established team, including 1 Admin Assistant, 1 Office Manager, 1 Network/IT, 1 Operations Manager, 2 Estimators, 1 Superintendent, 1 Residential Supervisor, 1 Federal Contracting Assistant, and 1 Bookkeeper. They also have 6 field crews with 1-2 men per truck. Their location includes a 4,200 sq. ft. office building (3 offices, 15 workstations, conference rooms, etc.), a 2,500 s. ft. warehouse, and a 1/2-acre equipment yard. The owner currently works part-time, primarily handling oversight of operations & reviewing of financials. To ensure a smooth transition of ownership, establish his stake in the ongoing success of the business, and as a show of good faith, the current owner has not only offered a one-year transition and/or training period, but has offered a seller carry rate of 12.5%.

     

    Priced at $1,500,000, this business is primed for new ownership to step in and continue the business’s upward growth pattern, as well as see new growth by expanding marketing tactics and growing the business to consumer residential work.  With the purchase, you would be getting $175K in assets as well, including crew vans/trucks, trailers, pressure washers, manlift, and everything else needed to continue to operate successfully.  

    PRICE $1,500,000 CASH FLOW $602,065

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • Staffing Support for Military & Federal Agencies – Diversified Positions

     

    This business provides staffing & labor for military branches and federal agencies such as the Navy, Air force, DOT, DOL, and DOD. They recruit and place personnel in very diversified positions including administration (receptionists, data entry, IT support, training leads, and program managers to name a few). Their highly trained staff is made up of 1 Controller, 1 In House Counsel serving as HR and Foreign Security Officer, 1 Business Development Representative, and 3 Admin, along with roughly 70 billable contract staff. Of the services provided, administrative support makes up 50% of their services, program management is 15%, Logistics makes up 30%, and IT is 5%. This business operation is very similar to a staffing agency.

     

    While there are two owners currently, one is basically just oversight and would not need a replacement moving forward, and the other is willing to stay on board for 3-4 years post-close to ensure a smooth and successful transition and ongoing growth.  Overall growth opportunities include expanding on the current potential for IT contracts, a great opportunity for a tech business to expand their services and expand their client base into the government sector. The working capital of nearly $400,000 will be given to the buyer and, with the low equipment needed, capital expenditure is nil.

     

    Priced at $2,795,000, this business is perfectly positioned for a buyer to step in and continue the already consistent year over year growth trends.  As a show of good faith, the current owners are willing to carry 20% of the financing. This is to help prove their vested interest in the ongoing success of the company.

     

    PRICE $2,795,000 CASH FLOW $627,203

  • Clothing & Apparel Importing – 3 International Manufacturers

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million for 2022. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 12.5% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 12.5%, new owners can anticipate a 203% return on investment in the first year!

     

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

     

    With a price of $2,950,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $1,197,641

  • Web Based Marketing and Brand Development Service

    This primarily web based multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm is located in NYC and has clients dispersed nationwide. These clients primarily consist of financial services, national insurance agencies, technology, communications, and health care businesses. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. Their core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies and, thanks to their ability work with consultants and freelancers as needed, they are able to adapt to any market ebb and flow. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless and their 29% profit margin displays the payoff of having an experienced team and dedication to their field.

     

    Their core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $10,900,000, this company is primed for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $10,900,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Passive Commercial Surveillance Company

     

    This opportunity is perfect for someone looking for a passive business. The current owner of this well-established commercial surveillance company lives out of the country for 4-6 months each year and the new owner can expect to do the same after the training period. This company installs popular surveillance systems for businesses in the Northern California area. A new owner will benefit from multiple growth opportunities: this business has great potential to expand into the residential sector if desired or operate as-is and enjoy an excellent return on the low down payment of $27,500!

     

    They are increasing installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expanding to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.) and adding government and municipal contracts would be perfect opportunities for revenue growth.

     

    • They are well-known in Northern California
    • 80% of sales is in the San Francisco Bay area, 15% regionally, and 5% of their business is nationwide.
    • Highly experienced team with everyone on the team having a 4+ year tenure
    • Uses advanced tech like secure wireless camera networks, license plate capturing cameras and Point of Sale surveillance systems

    The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and lives out of the country 4 months out of the year. The team is standardizing their service contracts to include both remote support and hands-on support, with an obvious preference for services they can provide remotely. Their camera systems offer real-time surveillance and video monitoring to ensure real-time protection.

     

    PRICE $275,000 CASH FLOW $76,776

  • Electrical Services Focused in Cable & Low Voltage Data installs

    Due to the current owners age, they have made the decision to sell the company below fair market value. With this purchase, a buyer would receive $317K in assets, which includes $235K in vehicles, $12K in equipment, and $70K in A/R while benefiting from a low overhead at the current 1,200 sq. ft. warehouse. This wellestablished high/low voltage cable installation company has $950,000 in project backlogs for 2022 and works with 100% commercial clients boasting an average of 47% profit margin! There are currently 7FT field technicians for installation work, with 2 PT office employees. The amount of field technicians employed varies depending on the project load, but their experienced crew provides excellent service, working with large, nationally known retail clients. With their well-trained staff, this company extends their services to 50 solid clients which includes local commercial construction firms, and subcontracting work for a national low voltage company. The two owners are married, with one acting as president of the company (and handling the A/P and A/R work, permits, and other office tasks) while the other owner acts as the vice president, handling the purchasing of materials for projects, and doing the estimating for forthcoming projects. Most of the owners’ responsibilities can be absorbed by staff members to allow for a more passive ownership but the current Owner is willing to stay with the company for up to 3 years in order to provide a smooth transition. This company has licenses to work in both Florida and Georgia, with their main service area spanning 2 hours from their home base in Tampa Bay, Florida. Services provided include high/low voltage cable installation, pre-construction design, generator installation, and troubleshooting for electrical, structured cabling, building controls and security, and life safety systems. The current process for obtaining contracts takes about 1-2 months, with the average cost per project being $10,000. Priced at $1,290,000, after debt payment the buyer would see a return of $479,205 in the first year after debt payments! This contractor provides a new owner with an experienced crew and client base that can not only continue its significant work in the commercial sector but also expand greatly into the residential market.

    PRICE $1,395,000 CASH FLOW $670,808

  • Online E-Commerce with 4,000 orders monthly

     

     

    This business is a Dropship E-Commerce Company with a 75% Repeat Clientele. This repeat client base focuses on materials that are used in medical offices, restaurants, offices and sanitation products. Providing over 400,000+ items, this business is able to drop ship anything pertaining to the industrial, janitorial, office, & restaurant markets as well as furniture and technology accessories. This E-Commerce business is currently fulfilling over 4,000 orders each month. This business has over 20 vendors, adding 2-3 new vendors each year. In addition to their success, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. This company is totally relocatable, with a small storage lease in Atlanta where return orders are processed. The owner currently lives in Tampa but has relocated to 3 different states over the course of the last 10 years proving that this business is truly relocatable. Their software, Channel Advisor, can manage up to 1 million SKUs allowing the new ownership significant room for growth. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and with the extremely efficient team of 7 cross-trained employees, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States.

    This company is priced at $4,850,000 and is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. Current ownership is confident in the continual success of this business and has offered a much larger than normal Promissory note and/or equity roll of 25% on this business and a training/transition period of one year or more if needed. The current owner is looking to sell this business due to health concerns as he Is preparing to undergo a back surgery.


    PRICE $4,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,238,004

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Data Capture & Thermal Label Equipment Sales & Services – $3M+ in Revenue

    With a 96% recurring client base primarily in manufacturing, warehousing, distribution, and logistics, this Georgia-based company had nearly $4M in sales in 2020! This value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Helping their clients succeed for 15 years, this company provides custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few. This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,840,000 CASH FLOW $589,682

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • International PR and Event Firm with Passive Ownership

     

    This international company has been around since 1995, and in that time has been able to establish a diversified clientele base made up of only 30% local and regional clients and 70% international clients! This has been possible thanks to their 64 experienced staff members including 5 management board members and 33FT and 26PT workers operating in graphic design, client relations, media analysis, web services, social media, administration, editing, and outreach. With this excellent chain of command, the owner has been able to transition to a completely passive ownership with no billable hours. This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency currently has a profit margin of 29%. The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management. 

     

    The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well. Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of 64. This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease. 

     

    At a purchase price of $1,500,000 and a down payment of $300,000, a buyer would see a return of $308,766 in the first year after debt payments! This business is established and ready for a new owner to step in!

    PRICE $1,500,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

Selfcare/Childcare (11)

  • Non-Medical Home Health & Recession Resistant

     

     

    This home health business handles the non-medical care of clients across 5 different counties! This agency has more than 50 caregivers employed and a top leadership team of 3 managers that allow the seller to work a minimal 15 hours per week. Not only are the clients for this business diversified, they will need the care offered by this establishment regardless of the current economic status, meaning this business is essentially recession resistant. The client type for this in-home care company consists of people who require more assistance within their day-day activities. Seniors, respite patients, those with dementia, and veterans are their main focus. This companion care business recently received a contract with the VA in 2021, expanding their already diverse client base. Located in Omaha, NE, their service area currently includes the Omaha Metropolitan Area and surrounding cities, reaching as far as Fremont, Ralston, Bellevue, and Council Bluffs. Primarily these caregivers are in the homes of their clients, allowing this business to operate out of a 2,800 sq. ft. office space which in return keeps the overhead cost low. The current owner is selling due to deterring health unfortunately.

    Priced at $849,000, the current owner has offered 10% financing as a show of good faith in the continued success of the business after sale. This investment has exponential growth including further development the Fremont and Council Bluffs client bases, developing the newly awarded VA contract, and creating partnerships with workman’s compensation divisions. While each of these opportunities could provide significant growth with minimal additional investment, a buyer could also have the chance to enjoy their 18% profit margin if they wanted to be passive and not do anything to improve!

     

    PRICE $849,000 CASH FLOW $239,207

  • Endodontics Practice: Seller will Stay up to 3 Years

    The current owner of this endodontics practice has a desire to step away from the business aspects of the practice in order to exclusively focus on his passion of patient care.  He has not only offered to stay on as the primary endodontist for 2-3 years after the purchase, he also offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show good faith in the direction and success of the business. Having been established over 50 years ago, this business is able to boast not only an excellent staff but also a stable and growing revenue thanks to their excellent and continual client pipeline and marketing strategies. With a staff consisting of 3 assistants, 2 front office staff members, and 2.5 DDS working in 4 fully furnished operatories, they are built to serve the entire Philadelphia area. This Endodontics practice is fully equipped to handle both surgical and non-surgical procedures and thanks to the variety of offered procedures they have developed an extremely diverse patient demographic. The business handles both pre- and post-procedure root canal work on all ages of clients and is equipped with the tools to cast same day fittings for the patient, which in return, provides the customer with a smile that they once lost due to aches and pains.

     

    Priced at $890,000, all prospective buyers regardless of background are welcome to inquire as the current owner is willing to do what is needed to ensure a smooth transaction. Included in the purchase of this business is $136,000 worth of equipment including the previously mentioned operatories along with microscopes and CPCT 3-D imaging machines. This practice has a great deal of growth opportunities, including an expansion of operations out into the Philadelphia suburbs as well as an increase of online presence and an increase in marketing in general. Just a 10% down payment of $89,000 returns $114,233 in the first year after debt payments—a 128% return on investment!

    PRICE $890,000 CASH FLOW $229,121

  • Non-Medical Home Care: Payor mix of Medicare, Private and Insurance

     

    This home health company based in Nebraska had a 44% profit margin in 2021 with 5 office administrators and 43 caregivers on staff. This company has been operating for 30 years, but this location has been open since 2018 providing care to Local clients of all age ranges, not just the elderly like most competitors. This business works well with Medicare, long term Care Insurance and also offers private financing options. Services offered by the 43 caregivers on staff include Grooming and hygiene, transferring and positioning, conversation and companionship, light housekeeping, toileting and incontinence care, transportation, medication reminders, nutrition and meal prep, grocery shopping and other errands. This business has gained a great reputation due to the company’s excellent service. The current owner has offered 6 months of training and their responsibilities include general oversight which averages 15 hours a week. With a very low multiple of 2.75 and a $170,000 Fair Market Valuation discount due to the current owners need to move, this business is primed for new ownership.

     

    Priced at $715,000, a 25% down payment of $178,750 returns $166,224 on the first year! The assets included in the purchase are valued at $60,000 and this includes office furniture, computers, webcams, printers, and a vehicle. This reputable company continues to grow due to their willingness to go the extra mile for their clients and consistent referrals. They currently operate out of a modest office space with 5 offices and a low overhead. Growth opportunities include developing an established marketing plan, partnering with insurance companies to expand services, hiring a sales representative to further expand the client flow, and advancing current marketing tactics.

     

    PRICE $715,000 CASH FLOW $262,590

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Colorado Based Day Spa with 600 Active Memberships

     

    This Colorado based day spa boasts 600 active memberships. This business does not require medical licensing as they do not offer aesthetic medical treatments like Botox or liposuction. The services primarily consist of massages and skincare treatment with massages making up 60% of their scheduled services and skincare making a combined 40% including facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Located in Bolder County, Colorado, this franchise spa location is right in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! This business operates out of a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that is not at maximum capacity. With a team of 28 team members including 3 team leads, this business has an established chain of command. The current owner handles oversight of the team, but the team leads primarily interact with the employees on an everyday leadership base. She also reviews and finalizes financial decisions including payroll, closing the books, and finalizing orders from vendors. She has confidently posited that many of her responsibilities could be transitioned and delegated to her employees during the offered 3–6-month training period after sale. The current owners of this establishment have been dealing with some medical concerns and are looking to retire.

     

    Priced at $545,000 this franchise establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known location in a prime location with support from both the current owner and from the national franchise base making it the perfect opportunity for a first-time business owner. Not only does this business expect to see an increase in profit margin with an upcoming increase in pricing to take effect in November, but they have room to expand their services by diversifying their service area. 

    PRICE $545,000 CASH FLOW $117,627

  • Salons Suites with 44 Spaces: Absentee owned

    This absentee owned business offers small-scale spa-based business owners the opportunity to run their business out of a well trafficked location with amenities including well-maintained space, business partnership opportunities, educational workshops through the franchise, and a complimentary concierge service. This salon suite franchise business has a loyal and established tenant base including multiple customers that have been with the business since its origins in 2015. This business is fiercely focused on client services because they know that as the host of a multitude of businesses, their name is intertwined with all their customers’ branding. The location for this business is a 10,000 square feet facility in West Hartford, CT with 44 suites for different clients to utilize. The current owner is looking to sell due to recent health issues coming to light. He has a passive role in the business which includes checking in with tenants as preferred and he likes to purchase everyone lunch once a month. New ownership would not need to hire a replacement and could easily step into this role.

    This business is unique in its ability to not only provide business owners an opportunity to live their dream without worrying about the details of running a business, but also the sense of comradery it evokes in customers. This establishment has created a major networking opportunity for businesses and a community of likeminded individuals working to build their dreams. New ownership could expand this community in a few ways. The current location has 1,000 sq. ft. that has not been converted into suites but could be. A buyer could also utilize the excellent reputation and longstanding clients to expand into an additional location.

    Priced at $530,000, A 10% down payment of $53,000 returns $143,976 in the first year after debt payments! This unique business has little local competition and is the prime choice for new and returning clients alike. Often, customers that have left their location to work in a separate boutique have returned for the lowered overhead costs and responsibilities as well as the individuality and community offered.

    PRICE $530,000 CASH FLOW $222,697

  • Ambulance and Nursing Home Transportation with Hospital Contracts

     

    With a down payment of $400,000, a buyer will receive over $1.5Million in assets! These assets include a Working Capital valued at $250,000, 25 Vehicles, Medical equipment and the technology necessary for operation. This Ambulatory business has “first call” contracts with the majority of their client base which include Midwest based hospitals, nursing homes, assisted living centers, and the VA. This ambulatory has a large and diverse staff in order to cater to their referring and repeat client base in both the emergency and non-emergency service base. Their established staff includes 1 general manager, 2 division supervisors, 2 billing reps, 9 dispatchers, 13 medics, 31 EMTs, 6 drivers, and 2 mechanics. Their primary services include ambulance transportation (which makes up 80% of their services) as well as wheelchair accessible or specialty transport, event standby, and EMS education services. The current owners are looking to sell as one is looking to retire and the other is interested in developing a non-competing business endeavor and they have offered a transition/ training period of 6 months. They both believe their responsibilities could be absorbed by their general manager as this GM has handled their responsibilities in the past. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet combined garage and dispatch center. The new business owner would have the opportunity to either lease this facility from the current owner or purchase it outright in a separate transaction.

     

    Priced at $2,250,000, this business is primed to return new ownership high levels of financial and operational success. Growth opportunities for this business moving forward would include getting involved with insurance contracts to offer community paramedic services including home visits to decrease individuals with a high rate of repeatedly needing ambulance assistance. With a profit margin of 24% this business is not only a sound investment, but important to their community. This business provides lifesaving services in a way that makes a huge impact in their clients’ lives, and with the purchase of this business, you could take part in making a change.

    PRICE $2,250,000

  • Day Spa – Absentee Owner – Financing in place

     

    This establishment has over 800 active memberships with 3 different packages to choose from. In addition to the memberships, these services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. With over $1.4 million in gross revenue in 2021, this business is on the path of continual growth. The purchase of this franchised day spa has $100,000 of seller financing and $150,000 of seller escrow included in the asking price! A new owner would have all of the assets needed to continue on this uphill profit trend while maintaining the operation’s current passive ownership with the business’s established staff of 25+ including 1 Assistant Manager and 2 team leads that can run the day-to-day operations. Located in Des Moines area, this day spa has a wide array of services offered including massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, spa packages, men’s treatments, waking, lash application and more. This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties and new ownership will have the opportunity to continue expanding this client base by maintaining or building upon the current marketing strategies already in play.

     

    As with most spas and similar operations, this business was mandated to close their doors in 2020 for 2 months, yet still saw an increase in revenue and profit that year. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the year of 2022. Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and their ability to provide a real resort feel within their community.

     

    The attractive price of $905,000 would allow any type of buyer to consider this listing. No spa or business background necessary for purchase! This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

     

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $269,161

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Multi Location Urgent Care with niche focus in Physicals

    Buyer does not need to be a doctor; the owner is passive and lives over 2 hours away! Their team of 19 includes 1 Business Development Manager, 3 Providers (Nurse Practitioners), 3 Billing Reps, 10 Medical Assistants, and 2 X-Ray Techs. For over 15 years, this multi-location practice has been providing care for workers compensation accidents, treating on the job injuries, DOT physicals, drug testing, and pre-placement screening in Elkhart, Indiana. The business development manager has brought on 90 new clients since 2020! Their repeat client base is businesses and employers in the area. The current owner only works 10 hours/week via phone and he is still willing to stay on board to train and transition for 2 years after closing to ensure a smooth transaction. There is little to no competition in the area, outside of expensive hospitals. This practice does not have any hospital affiliations.

    A 3rd location is fully equipped and ready to open as soon as the staff is all trained. With the purchase, a buyer would be getting in receipt of 2 vehicles, medical equipment, office furnishings, and A/R. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner will carry or hold an equity roll of 12.5%. Boasting a profit margin of 50%, year over year growth, and over $1.5M in cash flow, the numbers speak for themselves! Priced at $7,050,000, this business is a passive opportunity with exponential growth opportunities requiring minimal additional resources to be expended.

    PRICE $7,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,680,388

Vets/Pet Care/Animal Product (1)

  • 50+ Dog Capacity and Pet Boarding in Kearney

    The owner of this pet boarding and training facility spends about 10 hours a week overseeing operations making this a passive opportunity. Located in Kearney Nebraska, this Dog boarding and training business has a new, large facility that is fully-equipped to handle 50+ dogs. Offering full-service boarding, daycare, grooming and training to their loyal clients. Their training academy offers programs tailored for service dogs as well as behavioral training courses. The 5-person team is extremely competent, with each team member equipped with the knowledge and know-how when it comes to training, grooming, and caring for dogs. This business is poised to grow with a new, relocated indoor facility capable of housing 50+ dogs which allows plenty of space for training and the 24 included large kennels. To show good faith in the continued success of this business, the current owner has offered to finance 10% of the purchase price and has agreed to stay on with the company for 6 months to 1 year to ensure a smooth transition. Boasting a 67% profit margin with an annual cash flow of $186,913, this is a great opportunity for pet lovers and entrepreneurs alike. A 10% down payment of $58,500 returns $100,023 in the first year after debt payments!

    PRICE $585,000 CASH FLOW $186,913

Advertising/Marketing/Media/Print/Production (3)

  • Web Based Marketing and Brand Development Service

    This primarily web based multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm is located in NYC and has clients dispersed nationwide. These clients primarily consist of financial services, national insurance agencies, technology, communications, and health care businesses. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. Their core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies and, thanks to their ability work with consultants and freelancers as needed, they are able to adapt to any market ebb and flow. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless and their 29% profit margin displays the payoff of having an experienced team and dedication to their field.

     

    Their core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $10,900,000, this company is primed for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $10,900,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Design and Mail Marketing Company: Established 30 Years

    This medical mailer design and fulfillment business produces a specific niche product necessary to its industry for donation collection. This is well illustrated by their 300+ current clients in the medical, nonprofit, and dental fields. This excellent reputation, coupled with their top-notch work ethic, has led to many of their top clients continually returning for 10+ years. This mid-sized establishment has been servicing and creating business partnerships within the Omaha area for over 30 years. They can remain flexible on jobs that bigger companies would not be able to accept and skilled enough to be more efficient and reliable than smaller firms. Thanks to their skilled and established staff of 18 employees which include 2 Managers, a senior customer service representative, 8 production workers, 2 maintenance workers, their services can be utilized for a range of products including educational seminars and conference. To fill the consistent and diverse needs of these clients, the business purchase includes over $330,000 work of assets which collateralizes 63% of the bank loan needed.

     

    In addition to current services provided, the firm has room to grow outside of traditional printing jobs by utilizing staff’s current ability to handle layout, online marketing, and shipping services to expand further into the online field that can often be preferred in today’s market. The current owner is willing to assist with a smooth transition by offering at least one year of training which could also be used to assist in hiring and training an in store general manager if new ownership would prefer a hands-off management style.

     

    With a purchase price of $440,000 and a down payment of $44,000, a buyer would see a 634% return on investment of $278,938 in the first year after debt payments! This business is well set for a new owner to step in and continue the incredible legacy that has been built over the years. 

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $345,743

  • Bar and Grill

    This Omaha Metro Area’s Newest Bar and Grill has really brought a fun and upbeat spot for many to relax and dine in.  The owner had more than 20 years of industry experience owning and operating other bars in which this location was established in November of 2008. Individuals enjoy delicious American food favorites with cold beverages from the bar and grill. This facility features a casual dining atmosphere with great food and drink selections.  It has also been a great attraction for many to watch the fine world of sports. 

    PRICE $210,000 CASH FLOW $72,000

Maintenance/Service/Trades (19)

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial GC: Primary Clients in School Systems

    Boasting over a 20% increase in year over year revenue, this 15+ established business can be purchased with just $63,000 down. All vehicles, equipment, and assets are included in the $630,000 purchase price. Located in the Denver Metropolitan Area, this General Contractor focuses on municipal projects with over 50% of their income coming from state school systems. Due to the recently passed infrastructure bill, this company is recession proof due to their municipality focus. General Contracting services provided include new builds and foundations, renovations, drywall, electrical system installation, plumbing, and demolition. With a manager and 2 superintendents and an accountant, the majority of work is delegated to subcontractors.

     

    The current owner of this business is looking to retire from his current role of handling the estimating and bid management for the business. Before stepping away from this operation, he is dedicated to ensuring the ongoing success and comfort of both the staff and clients. This is why he has offered a transition period of up to 3 years. As an added demonstration of his vested interest in the ongoing success of the business, he has also offered to carry 10% of the purchase price via either seller financing or equity roll. Priced at $630,000, this general contractor with over 15 years of experience and reputation under their belt is a fantastic opportunity for a wide variety of buyers. This business has exponential room for growth in almost every field as the owner has kept things small out of personal preference. The business could expand in almost every aspect including self-performed labor, client base, geography, marketing tactics, and more making it a potential gold mine waiting to be discovered. It has a wealth of resources that could be found invaluable to an individual looking to step out of their current construction job and build up their own business, an existing contractor looking to expand into the municipal client base, or a subcontractor looking to expand the services they can offer outside of their current niche.

    PRICE $630,000 CASH FLOW $174,907

  • Project Management for Franchisee Remodeling – No Self Performed Labor

     

    This business specializes in remodel and mercantile work for strip centers, warehouses, and distribution centers. This remotely operated commercial remodel business is working for repeat, long tenured clients across the United States such as Leslie Pools and Michaels! There is a strong backlog for 2023 and with this business model of not self-performing any of the labor, the capex is very low! With their clients and contractors being across the country, plus having no physical location, this business is fully relocatable! The full-time W2 staff consists of 2 employees, 1 office administrator and 1 supervisor. Additionally, they have a multitude of 1099 contractors that have been vetted and have worked for the company previously and can be called upon for projects as they come available in their specific area. Established in 1993, this business has an industry leading reputation in their field and currently has no marketing services in place due to their high levels of repeat customers and referral-based work. The current owner of this establishment handles project oversite and client relations. He is looking to retire, but to make the transition process as easy as possible, he has offered a training period of up to 1 year for a new owner.

     

    Priced at $1,400,000, a 10% down payment of $140,000 returns $244,434 in the first year after debt payments! A 175% return on investment! This business would be an ideal opportunity for a new entrepreneur looking to buy a business with tenured established, no equipment needed, and the owner is willing to carry 20%. This could also be a good fit for a strategic buyer wanting to expand their geographic client base or expand into the commercial space. Either way, with their long-standing reputation for customer service and flexibility, extensive growth opportunities, and streamlined operation this business has an excellent foundation to expand upon. 

    PRICE $1,400,000 CASH FLOW $355,538

  • Commercial Janitorial – Owner is Part Time

     

    This operation currently has 24 clients and works in a total of 28 buildings, they primarily handle office cleanings for small businesses which make up 80% of their clients. 10% of their clients are daycare centers and schools and the remaining 10% is a combined compilation of churches, medical offices and labs, and professional service offices. The staff consists of 10 W2 cleaners who each have client accounts to handle and can operate almost entirely independent. This office cleaning service has an established contractor style business operation that leaves the current owner to work part-time, about 20 hours per week, handling business coordination as well as payroll and invoicing. While the current owner has offered a transition period of up to 3 months, she strongly believes a buyer or replacement could be trained to take over her position in less than said allocated time. Located in Omaha, NE since 2002, the staff is able to primarily operate on location with their clients, leaving this business with the opportunity to reduce overhead costs by not having a centralized office space, which has been proven effective with their current 30% profit margin.

     

    Priced at $305,000 this business is listed with an extremely low multiple of only 3 times the cash flow! A 10% down payment of $30,500 returns $52,963 in the first year after debt payments! To further cement the stability of this acquisition opportunity, the current owner has offered to finance 10% of the purchase price as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. This is an excellent opportunity for a first-time buyer, a residential cleaning service looking to expand into commercial work without adding a ridiculous amount of overhead fees, or a cleaning service in the surrounding areas of Omaha wanting to expand geographically. Not only does this business have an established team that operates like a well-oiled machine and an excellent profit margin, they have room for continued growth moving forward. Growth opportunities include establishing a marketing presence as their primary route for new clients is via word-of-mouth as well as expanding their current geographic service area.

    PRICE $305,000 CASH FLOW $98,264

  • Sourcing & Location of Materials for Municipal Road Work

    This business sources materials from national manufacturers & vendors, processes submittals for review & approval, releases materials & schedule delivery, and processes & tracks billings in a timely manner. They are a bulk material supplier & procurement company that provides services for municipal job sites where Prime Contractors are performing utility and bridge installations, including ductile/concrete pipe, precast storm drainage & utility structures, cast iron manholes, and inlet frames/covers. The team includes 1 VP, 1 Controller, 1 Estimator, and 2 Administrative Specialists. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. There have been three years of growth in revenue, going from $17 Million in 2020 to $23 Million in 2022! There is over $4.5M in contract receivables, which a buyer would take over on day of close. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the current owner is willing to roll equity and hold a promissory note for up to 20% of the total price. He is also happy to stay on board for 1-2 years post close to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    After building this business and operating in this industry for 20 years, the current owner is ready for a change of pace and is interested in exploring the next chapter of his life. New ownership can expect to step into a stable investment with three locations, including a primary location in Delaware and satellite locations in Georgia and Florida.

     

    Priced at $4,700,000 this business has an established business operation with over $1.1M in assets and enough stability for a new owner to step in and continue operating the business as is.  This opportunity also affords new owners enough flexibility to change things up and try out some new growth routes.  

    PRICE $4,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,275,044

  • Roofing Company with 2.4M in Receivables

    This residential roofing business has been in service for over 20 years and they have $2.4M in receivables! they have 2 locations with their main location in Manassas, VA and the second satellite location an hour away, both locations have a General Manager to ensure smooth individual operations. Boasting over $1.45M in cash flow in 2021 in addition to the previously mentioned $2.4M in AR, this opportunity would allow new ownership to continue and grow the business’s current operations. The team consists of 16 employees including 2 office managers, 5 office staff, and 7 sales reps, this roofing business not only has an established chain of command but has also been able to keep their CapEx and Liability low by outsourcing all of the business’s labor. The current owner only focuses on the oversite of sales and even with his minimal involvement in day-to-day activities, he is willing to stay on board with the business for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth transition. The services offered include roof inspection and installation, gutter repair, siding, windows, floors, decks, drywall, and storm restoration which are utilized by over 5,000 clients in Virginia, West Virginia, and Maryland.

     

    In the Northeast U.S., April through September is storm season, which is the busiest time of year for this company. After a hailstorm, there is a 50% chance that a roof will have a leak. They have learned to utilize this information by increasing their cold call and door to door sales to coincide with this optimum business opportunity. Because of this niche market, the business has proven to be pandemic and recession proof.  Their team works with clients’ insurance companies to ensure that customers get the most out of their claim. Coupled with the high levels of customers coming in due to referrals (70%!), and their average online rating of 4.8, this business is primed for growth. Outside of their already incredible client base, there would be easy expansion into commercial and government work as well.

     

    The current owner is willing to carry up to 20% of the $2,800,000 purchase price, to show their established confidence in the company’s ability to continue successfully. A 10% down payment of $280,000 would show a 363% ROI of $1,016,385 in the first year after debt payments!  This fantastic return on investment rate is due to their willingness to sell the business for over $800,000 less than the fair market valuation!

    PRICE $2,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,450,753

  • K-12 & University Focused Architecture Firm with Multiple Locations

    The current owner of this business is looking to not only stay with the business for five years after sale, but has also offered to carry 25% or more! This architecture firm has a focus on higher education and K-12, with 4.1M in backlog, they are poised for an acquisition. The industry average for seller financing is 10%. This owner is open to a 30% carry showing good faith in the ongoing success and the seller’s vested interest in the success of the business after sale. The firm has nearly 20 years of experience under their belt, and their leadership team has been well mentored. The team consists of 31 employees including 2 SVP’s, 1 CFO, several architects, interior designers, and administrators. Based in New York City, this business has been able to accumulate an excellent reputation spurred on by happy clients which has led to 90% repeat clientele. A strategic new owner with experience in architecture and engineering would have 6 years of seller transitioning of the business and a foot into the New York market.

     

    This business currently only has hospital clients making up roughly 10% of their customer base and with their current team, resources, and connections this would be an excellent opportunity for growth without expending unnecessary resources. 

     

    Priced at $4,300,000 this business is primed to return year over year success to anyone in a related industry. Someone that knows how to operate in this field would be able to not only enjoy the expected organic growth pattern brought forward by the world’s focus on education and building new opportunities, but put forth new growth opportunities without having to utilize exponential resources on accumulating additional assets.

    PRICE $4,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,014,009

  • Telecommunications management: Tower Erection and Site Maintenance

    This Dallas based Telecom maintenance and management company has a primary focus on merging networks and overlaying technology into existing structures, which make up 80% of their services. They also handle tower erection, site/tower inspections, electrical services, and compound maintenance and repairs which account for the remaining 20% of revenue. Their current team is made up of 18 skilled employees including 2 project managers, 2 construction managers, 3 crew supervisors along with 3 crews of 3 people, 1 AR manager, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 CPA. They provide service in the northern and western areas of Texas, as well as Oklahoma and Louisiana. The purchase of this business includes over $600,000 of assets. They finalized a signed contract with AT&T December of 2022 – they are conservatively forecasting 2023 Revenue of $6,500,000 with an 18% Net Profit for a cash flow of $1,170,000. The current owner handles general oversight and money management, including approving large purchases and payroll, he works roughly 25 hours per week and is mentoring his VP and Operations Manager. The seller has offered a 1-2-year training/transition period to ensure this process is as smooth as possible for all involved.

     

    This business is working through the stages of signing with Verizon as an active client to begin work in mid-2023. They are also actively working towards a partnership with Verizon. There are less than 10 major carriers within the cell tower industry, meaning there will always be customer concentration in this space.

     

    Priced at $1,750,000 this telecom company is ready for new ownership to step in and continue the excellent reputation that has been curated since 2009. The current owner is invested in the future success of this business and to illustrate this point, has offered 10% of seller financing and 10% equity roll if the buyer desires, this is twice as much as the standard offer. With a long-standing and established client base and pipeline, as well as an excellent and skilled staff, this business is primed to offer new ownership the opportunity for continual ongoing success and reliable income. 

    PRICE $1,750,000 CASH FLOW $540,602

  • Manufacturing of Cast Stone Exteriors – No Installation

     

    This business handles the fabrication of precast stone for masonries and 75% of their work is done for municipal contracts. Due to this extremely stable client base, there will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession. In fact, due to the newly passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business can expect organic growth opportunities in the upcoming year. To add to the stability of this business, they currently have a 90% repeat client base made up of B2B work with the masons being the direct client, not the end user. This operation only handles the manufacturing and fabrication of the cast stone, the do not handle any installation of the products in exterior walls. The services offered include creating a mold and color matching stones for historical buildings that need stones which are no longer available or for eye-catching statement pieces in new locations. Clients that take advantage of these fully customizable stones primarily include museums, commercial locations, and high-end multi-family housing units.

    This Chicago based establishment offers a niche service and, because of this, their nearest competition is 30 miles away. This organization has nearly 20 employees with experts in management including a production manager, plant manager, supply manager; along with 1 drafter, 1 sales rep, 2 mold shop and 12 plant production workers. This team allows the current owner to only work 20-25 hours handling bookkeeping and some deliveries out of personal preference.

    Priced at $2,300,000 this business is ready for a new owner to step in and continue operating on the foundation laid before them. The seller has offered a training period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition of ownership as well as to finance 20% of the purchase price as a show of good faith. With an excellent staff, reputation that’s been established since 2010, and large warehouse with a significant amount of unused space, this niche business is primed to offer a new and excited owner exponential growth opportunity with minimal additional investments needed.

     

    PRICE $2,300,000 CASH FLOW $511,011

  • Electrical Shop for Municipalities with 20 Million in Backlog

    Established in 1993 and located in NYC, this business operates in all five boroughs consistently offering competitive pricing to obtain both small and large projects. This Commercial Electrical Contracting company focuses on System Installation & Power for municipal projects. This company’s backlog for 2023 currently stands at $20.2Million with a Working Capital valued at $2.9Million. No bank loan is needed to finalize this deal, the seller asks that the new owner would absorb the 3 loans already in existence. The buyer would receive $2,635,000 in Working Capital as a part of the assets of the business, this will make a notable difference in offsetting the debt absorption associated with the purchase. Their services include lighting, power, access control, fire alarms, analytics, system installation, and security systems. This industry leading team works with electrical contractors and large company buildings as well as transportation businesses specializing in rail, bus, and elevator services. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The current office space is 3,000 sq. ft. with 5-office staff that handle operations and client relations with 2 additional warehouses with over 20 tradesmen.

     

    They specialize in establishing BIM contracts for clients using industry-based software. Using these tools to make the design and installation of electrical projects more efficient and cost effective. The current owner of this commercial electric contracting company handles general oversight of the business and is looking to sell so she can spend time with her terminally ill spouse. The current owner has agreed to stay on for a year to provide a smooth transition and will maintain 20% equity if desired by the buyer. With a down payment of $450,000, a buyer can acquire not only this business, but also their reputation for being dedicated to providing quality and reliable electric work to its clients. Due to the fact that they have been in business for almost 30 years, a majority of their clients are repeat or referrals. This electric company is ready to leave a new owner with an experienced crew and client base that will continue its effective work and legacy. 

    PRICE $4,220,000 CASH FLOW $1,015,788

  • Passive Des Moines Home Renovation Company

     

    This passive Des Moines based home renovation company is stable and has huge growth potential! Boasting an amazing reputation which leads to repeat clients and referrals, this company has more than $1,600,000 in the pipeline for Q1 alone, which annualizes out to $6.4M in projected revenue! There is nearly $1M in assets including the company’s 14 vans, power tools, and inventory. This well-built operation is passive – with the owner dedicating only 5 to 7 hours a week to the business - but also boasts room to grow if an ambitious new owner wants to lean into growth opportunities. A well-executed hiring campaign to increase the volume of work, as well as possibly opening a satellite location, could drive this business even higher. 

     

    This experienced team provides a “one-stop-shop” approach to residential kitchen and bath remodels. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every installation by completing all work in house except for countertop instillation. Their complete showroom and an onsite designer provide 3D renderings for projects that allows for stress-free selections. Most projects happen in the kitchen (45%), the bathroom (45%), as well as other remodeling projects throughout the home. A 12% down payment of $677,829 returns $718,052 in the first year even after debt payments!

     

    An incredible asset of this business is the well-trained and experienced team who are cross-trained in many different skills and many of whom have a long tenure with the company. Leads manage the projects, and the general manager handles the day-to-day operations with the help of an office manager. The team works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. office building. The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and is willing to lease to the next owner. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has a long-standing relationship with customers; they are able to keep their service area within a 30-mile radius of the Des Moines metro.

    PRICE $5,648,580 CASH FLOW $1,569,050

  • Utility and Road Infrastructure – Municipal and School Focus protects from Recession

     

    Performing Excavation and Site Prep for Highways, School Districts and Municipalities; all client types that will protect this company from a looming recession, as the newly passed infrastructure bill will organically grow this Civil Contracting Firm through the public sector funded by tax payer dollars. Primarily serving Virginia, Kentucky, and West Virginia with their leadership team in Evansville, Indiana outside of the Corporate Headquarters. This firm has a diverse list of clients, including Municipalities 36%, Government 22%, Schools 23%, and Commercial 19%.  There is an impressive team in place of 120+, including 3 SVP’s, 8 superintendents, 1 office manager, 1 administrator/billing, and +/- 110 laborers.  With a backlog of over $33M, there is no shortage of coming work.  A buyer would be getting over $18M in assets with this purchase, including construction & transportation equipment, office equipment & software, and working capital of nearly $5M!  A 3rd party appraisal was completed in June of 2022 to verify the assets. 

     

    The current owner offers general oversight (by preference), which is not necessity as owner is 80+ years old.  He is willing to stay and transition for 1-2 years after closing.  The reason for selling at this time is to retire.  Something of note is that the owner could sell the equipment and cash out the A/R for more than the business price, but due to his loyalty and employees in place, he is choosing to sell the business as one cohesive unit so everyone keeps their jobs, and the business can continue to thrive as his legacy. 

     

    As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner is willing to carry 15% of the purchase price.  At a purchase price of $19,250,000, and assets valued at over $18M, the bank loan would be over-collateralized by the assets on hand and the return on investment makes this deal the top in our portfolio!


    PRICE $19,250,000 CASH FLOW $6,416,340

  • Glazing Contractor with 35k sq. ft. Factory & $7.5M in Backlog

    There is amazing growth potential for a new owner of this OKC Glazing Contractor; expanding services into Texas, Arkansas, Kansas, and Missouri would give a huge revenue boost! With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this company has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the business has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,020,000, the factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place for this business. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $252,500 returns $281,137 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,020,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • Earthwork, Shoreline Protection, Site Prep in Texas – 90+ FT Employees

    This Earthwork & Industrial Site Prep business completes 225 jobs per year, with a minimum of 20 active projects at one time!  Located in Victoria, Texas and with 90+ FT employees, their average client tenure is 13 years. Sale size ranges from $10k to $1.5M, with an average of $350k. With $9.4M in WIP and over $3M in their pipeline, work is plentiful for this well-diversified team. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 30% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 70% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own 90+ person team completing the work, which boosts profit margin.

     

    Over $7M in assets includes $5M in heavy equipment, $1.2M in vehicles, $57k worth of trailers, tools valued at $365k, and office furniture & software worth $379k. The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month; this rate would be kept the same under new ownership. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years where they have a 75% win rate; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 25% success rate on those. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area to other gulf states for high margin erosion control projects and actively pursuing more bids would certainly lead to an increase in revenue. There is currently a very limited sales team and little to no marketing. Working Capital is $2.1M and would transfer to the new owner.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,154,501

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • 70+ Years for KC HVAC Design, Fabrication, and Installation

    With a 22,000 sq. ft. fabrication shop and 41 skilled personnel on staff, this HVAC design and installation company has been in operation for 70 years! Clients for this business include education, manufacturing, industrial, medical, government, and municipalities. The team is comprised of 9 office staff, along with 4 in the shop, 7 service staff, and 21 field employees. Not only do they specialize in new construction and renovation ventures, but they successfully work on refrigeration systems and manage projects as prime contractors as well.  The team focuses mainly on new construction (40%) and renovations (45%), and their service department accounts for 15% of annual revenues.  Prime contracts amount to about 15-20% of work performed. The service department performs approximately $1.5M per year, while hard bid projects are in the $10.5M range.

    This multi-faceted business is held in high regard by the general contractors, architects, and engineers in the Kansas City Metro.  Their increasing revenues show that this healthy business is growing organically through positive word-of-mouth reviews and high-quality workmanship. 

    Priced at $1,725,000, a new owner could easily continue the current successful trajectory, as well as grow the business by expanding the maintenance and service contracts.  The business operates from a complex that has ample space for all current operations with room for continued expansion.  A large 30,000 square foot building features a 22,000 square foot shop which is the fabrication hub and the remaining spaces (8,000 square feet) are utilized as storage warehousing.  The lots are both paved and offer plenty of parking and working space.   

    PRICE $1,725,000 CASH FLOW $676,827

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • Commercial Roofing with 16 Million in Backlog

     

     

    After 30 years in business, this 100% commercial roofing company has over 16 million in backlog and does 70% maintenance work! Their team includes 25 administrative staff members and a combined 60 metal workers and craftsman. The business will use subcontractors on a rare and minimal scale for specialty work. Their client base spans over a 120-mile radius of Erie, PA and consists of exclusively commercial clients, which, coupled with their excellent reputation, has led to their customer pool being made up of 60% recurring clients. Having been open for over 30 years, this business and team have been able to acquire an excellent reputation with their clients and have established profitable partnerships in their community and surrounding areas which keeps word of mouth marketing effective all year round. Though the owner is active in oversight and management, he is willing to stay on for 2 years post-close to not only train & transition, but to help find and train his replacement if the buyer desires. With over $6 million of assets included in the purchase, new ownership can expect to continue this business’s ongoing growth pattern without investing excessive resources into expanding opportunities. They fully self-perform all labor and have an extensive staff and established chain of command.

     

    This area is well known for their requirements of union-based employees and businesses for construction or repair work. Thankfully, this business is well intertwined with local unions, and 75% of their current projects come from those established partnerships. While they do some public work with these ties, expanding their partnerships and open bids to include more municipal work would be a huge opportunity for growth. Other opportunities would include expanding into residential work or growing the new installation side of business as their current primary focus is maintenance and repair.

     

    Priced at $14,950,000 a 10% down payment of $1,495,000 returns $1,619,957 in the first year after debt payments. The current owner is selling as part of his retirement strategy. 

     

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $3,615,422

  • Architecture Firm Specializing in Commercial Mixed use: Seller will stay 3 years

    The architecture firm primarily focuses on senior care facilities and Commercial mixed-use properties in conjunction with mixeduse commercial and residential clients. In 2022 this business annualized nearly 1.4 million in sales with $690,989 in cash flow which averaged a 50% profit margin and included in the purchase of this business is a working capital worth $308,452. The current owner works full time in the business as the primary designer as well as handling general oversite and assisting with marketing as needed. Not only has the owner offered a 2-year training and transition period with the necessary retainment salary accounted for in the listed cash flow, he has also offered a 15% seller carry as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. This architecture firm is incredibly well-established having been around for 34 years. While the firm currently works with clients in Canada, they have worked with clients internationally in the past including clients in the US, India, China, Malaysia, and more. Their services include full range architectural and master-planning services from briefing all the way to final certificate.

    With a reliable staff of 9 employees including: 1 Senior Project Manager, 1 Registered Senior Project Architect, 1 experienced staff architect in the process of acquiring their architecture registration, 2 administrative employees handling project invoicing and accounting, 1 long term contract employee, and 2-3 contract workers that offer additional support for design and technical drawing side of the business; this firm has been able to withstand every economic storm thrown their way. While this business was heavily impacted by the Covid19 pandemic, this is neither the first nor the last fluctuation that the business will survive and eventually thrive after making it through. A potential buyer has exponential room for growth if they choose to expand the current service area to clients across the globe.

    Priced at $1,600,000 this architecture firm is an incredibly reliable investment opportunity for a larger architecture firm to roll this business into their current portfolio, a smaller architecture firm to double in size, or a young architect to take their first step into the professional industry with an established portfolio and reputation. While this business was originally impacted by covid in a negative manner, they have once again established their continued stability by coming back better than before in 2022 with an increased gross revenue, and nearly doubled profit margin when compared with pre-pandemic numbers.

    PRICE $1,600,000 CASH FLOW $693,989

  • Property Management with 29% Profit Margin

    Serving Milwaukee to Kenosha for over 15 years, this property management company has a strong client base made up of Property Investors, focused in multifamily apartments.  They take pride in having less than a 3% vacancy rate; plus there are contracts to onboard an additional 3,000 units.  This is the main reason for the sale – the current owner would like to bring on a strategic buyer for the upcoming growth.  He would roll equity for up to 20% as a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company.  They have a sister company that performs all maintenance and can fully rehab any units needing tenant improvement, making this property management firm unique.  The well-developed leadership team includes a CFO, one Senior Vice President handing property management, and another Senior Vice President controlling the construction division.  There are also 3 Property Managers, 4 in Maintenance, and 1 Office Admin.

     

    The owner oversees his leadership team and will do some site sourcing, as he still finds this enjoyable.  His teams handles the day-to-day operations.  The acquisition includes about $450K in assets and boasts a healthy sales pipeline with growth and projects in Austin, Texas.  Asking $3,300,000 with only 10% down from the buyer and 70% from a lender.  This streamlined property management business early a 29% profit margin could be yours!

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $770,867

  • Expert Witness Placement & Strategy: Law Firm Consultants

    Consultants for law firms where they place and prepare expert witnesses for litigation & trial. The buyer does not need to be an attorney ass the current owner is not one. This firm’s client base are top, usually recognizable companies or that need assistance finding expert witnesses, case analysis, witness reports, and trial strategy & preparation. Over the years, this operation has been able to create a network of experts to consult with and has a stable team of 12; made up of mostly attorneys, law professors, MBAs, and accountants. The personnel of the firm work remotely, meaning they have extremely low overhead costs! This drives their 44% profit margin and allows them to take on clients across the United States and internationally. The current owner has some roles in business development and staff oversight. He has recently been offloading more of his client facing roles in order to prepare for a smooth transition. Seller has offered a transition period ranging from 1 to 2 years. Additionally, the Owner is willing to seller finance or roll equity of up to 15% as a sign of good faith.

     

    Priced at $6,200,000 this business offers a strategic buyer the opportunity to expand their practice or this opportunity for an individual with legal experience looking to start their own practice. This consulting firm has a stable team, client base, and network that offer extreme growth opportunities moving forward. Options vary and include creating a division of the business to handle opposition research in order to find contradictions or indiscretions that would assist with discrediting the opposition’s expert witness, expanding geographically to focus on more contracts outside of the US, working with class action cases, and taking on cases for the International Trademark Association.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,267,441

  • Managed Services for IT

     

    This IT company offers managed services such as server architecture and design, Microsoft office 360, system backups and restorations, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services as an add on service for current clients. Based on the first half of the year, and their consistent growth pattern, this company is expected to have an annualized cash flow of over $2M! The purchase of this business not only includes an excellent reputation for customer service, but also an established and efficient team consisting of 7 W2 employees including 2 Sales Associates, 3 IT Engineers, and 2 office administrators. Their current client base has consisted of 85% repeat customers annually thanks to not only their high levels of vested ongoing customers but also their ability to cross advertise to varying clientele. The owner of this cloud and IT management service has full faith in the continued success of this business and to show his vested interest in the operation has offered to carry or roll equity of 30% as a sign of good faith in the continued success of the business. This offer, which is far above the market average of carrying 10% total, is on top of the presented 2-year transition period even though the current owner’s responsibilities of general oversite and aiding the team could easily be absorbed by the skilled staff.  

     

    Established in 2011, this business is located in Omaha, NE. Their current service area is primarily throughout Eastern NE, but they have the potential for worldwide clients. New ownership has countless possibilities for further growth, or the chance to relax and enjoy the current organic growth path the team is on as 2022 is set to be their best year yet with an annualized revenue of over $9M and a 21% profit margin. 

     

    Priced at $8,900,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the lucky new owners. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service or geographically expanding the customer base outside of Eastern Nebraska. 

    PRICE $8,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,953,071

  • Well Established Full-Service Civil Engineering

    This full-service civil engineering firm has $2M worth of work on the books for 2022 and current numbers are annualizing to show that they are set to make $2.5M in 2022 which is higher than pre-pandemic numbers. With a profit margin of 23%, the 2022 annualized cash flow is $408,956. Based in Chicago, this firm has been in service since 1955 and with their excellent local reputation and established government contracts, this second-generation company is primed for continued growth. Services offered include Civil Engineering, Surveying, Construction Management, Forensic Engineering, GIS and CAD. They currently have a customer base that is primarily made up of government and municipal work (75%) and also includes education (8%), contractors (9%), and private companies (8%). The two current owners work full time for the business. Owner 1 handles general management and oversight as well as marketing while owner 2 is the managing engineer and senior project manager. The current team operates out of a 6000 square foot office space. There are 11 total employees on staff, outside of the owners. This includes 3 engineers, 1 surveyor, 1 CADD manager, 3 survey team members, and 3 administrative assistants. Their team boasts impressive credentials and experience beyond many of their competitors. These qualifications, along with the firm’s long-established reputation in local governments and municipalities give the firm a strong competitive advantage when bidding on projects. Because of the strong team in place, a new owner would not need to be a licensed engineer, as the staff on hand already has the necessary licenses.

    At a price of $1,050,000 and a down payment of $105,000, a buyer would receive $164,611 after debt payments, resulting in a 157% return on investment in the first year! The existing team is set up to continue operating after the current owners leave. However, the sellers are also open to staying on as strategic partners and helping the new owner grow the business in the years to come. Other opportunities for new ownership include hiring another surveyor or EIT to bring on additional projects. This business is p

    PRICE $1,050,000 CASH FLOW $330,965

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Staffing Firm for Temp-to-Hire

    This staffing agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their diverse client base in the professional and clerical fields. This includes full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing and payrolling services. These services can be utilized for part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis, with a turnaround time of 2 weeks to 2 months. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. Located in Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

     

    Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Priced at $540,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts. 

    PRICE $540,000 CASH FLOW $135,530

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Data Capture & Thermal Label Equipment Sales & Services – $3M+ in Revenue

    With a 96% recurring client base primarily in manufacturing, warehousing, distribution, and logistics, this Georgia-based company had nearly $4M in sales in 2020! This value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Helping their clients succeed for 15 years, this company provides custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few. This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,840,000 CASH FLOW $589,682

  • Multi Location Urgent Care with niche focus in Physicals

    Buyer does not need to be a doctor; the owner is passive and lives over 2 hours away! Their team of 19 includes 1 Business Development Manager, 3 Providers (Nurse Practitioners), 3 Billing Reps, 10 Medical Assistants, and 2 X-Ray Techs. For over 15 years, this multi-location practice has been providing care for workers compensation accidents, treating on the job injuries, DOT physicals, drug testing, and pre-placement screening in Elkhart, Indiana. The business development manager has brought on 90 new clients since 2020! Their repeat client base is businesses and employers in the area. The current owner only works 10 hours/week via phone and he is still willing to stay on board to train and transition for 2 years after closing to ensure a smooth transaction. There is little to no competition in the area, outside of expensive hospitals. This practice does not have any hospital affiliations.

    A 3rd location is fully equipped and ready to open as soon as the staff is all trained. With the purchase, a buyer would be getting in receipt of 2 vehicles, medical equipment, office furnishings, and A/R. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner will carry or hold an equity roll of 12.5%. Boasting a profit margin of 50%, year over year growth, and over $1.5M in cash flow, the numbers speak for themselves! Priced at $7,050,000, this business is a passive opportunity with exponential growth opportunities requiring minimal additional resources to be expended.

    PRICE $7,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,680,388

B2B: Services/Wholesalers/Suppliers (30)

  • Maintenance in Commercial Roofing: Reoccurring

     

    Their client base is made up of 100% commercial clients including consultants, general contractors, private real estate owners, construction managers, and municipalities, 65% of whom are repeat clients. With 95 W2 Employees, this commercial roofing business is able to self-perform 100% of their labor. With $16M already lined up in backlog (committed contracts), they are on target to have the best year ever in 2023, and there is no sign of slowing down in 2023! Their services include reroofing/scheduled replacement (50%), new construction (40%), and general repair & maintenance (10%) and are able to service a wide service area including a 75-mile radius of Akron. The sale of this business includes $5M in assets, including 30+ trucks & trailers, and $2.6M in equipment. This means that new ownership would be able to easily build on current growth opportunities without needing to invest excessive resources to do so. Growth opportunities include going after more maintenance/service work, sheet metal projects, and the recently approved US Infrastructure Bill will also provide growth across the municipal clients they work with. The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-tomonth basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction. Priced at $14,950,000, this business is primed for new ownership with already long-standing client relationships in place, an excellent reputation, and a strong word of mouth job pipeline. The owners are looking forward to retiring out of state, but the two active owners are more than happy to stay on board post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Owner 1 handles the oversight and management, as well as review of estimates and would stay for 1 year, Owner 2 handles the day-to-day operations and would stay for 2 years, and Owner 3 (absentee) does not need replacing. They would be willing to retain equity or carry a note for 15%, showing their vested interest in the ongoing success on the company.

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $2,592,337

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Expert Witness Placement & Strategy: Law Firm Consultants

    Consultants for law firms where they place and prepare expert witnesses for litigation & trial. The buyer does not need to be an attorney ass the current owner is not one. This firm’s client base are top, usually recognizable companies or that need assistance finding expert witnesses, case analysis, witness reports, and trial strategy & preparation. Over the years, this operation has been able to create a network of experts to consult with and has a stable team of 12; made up of mostly attorneys, law professors, MBAs, and accountants. The personnel of the firm work remotely, meaning they have extremely low overhead costs! This drives their 44% profit margin and allows them to take on clients across the United States and internationally. The current owner has some roles in business development and staff oversight. He has recently been offloading more of his client facing roles in order to prepare for a smooth transition. Seller has offered a transition period ranging from 1 to 2 years. Additionally, the Owner is willing to seller finance or roll equity of up to 15% as a sign of good faith.

     

    Priced at $6,200,000 this business offers a strategic buyer the opportunity to expand their practice or this opportunity for an individual with legal experience looking to start their own practice. This consulting firm has a stable team, client base, and network that offer extreme growth opportunities moving forward. Options vary and include creating a division of the business to handle opposition research in order to find contradictions or indiscretions that would assist with discrediting the opposition’s expert witness, expanding geographically to focus on more contracts outside of the US, working with class action cases, and taking on cases for the International Trademark Association.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,267,441

  • Commercial Janitorial – Owner is Part Time

     

    This operation currently has 24 clients and works in a total of 28 buildings, they primarily handle office cleanings for small businesses which make up 80% of their clients. 10% of their clients are daycare centers and schools and the remaining 10% is a combined compilation of churches, medical offices and labs, and professional service offices. The staff consists of 10 W2 cleaners who each have client accounts to handle and can operate almost entirely independent. This office cleaning service has an established contractor style business operation that leaves the current owner to work part-time, about 20 hours per week, handling business coordination as well as payroll and invoicing. While the current owner has offered a transition period of up to 3 months, she strongly believes a buyer or replacement could be trained to take over her position in less than said allocated time. Located in Omaha, NE since 2002, the staff is able to primarily operate on location with their clients, leaving this business with the opportunity to reduce overhead costs by not having a centralized office space, which has been proven effective with their current 30% profit margin.

     

    Priced at $305,000 this business is listed with an extremely low multiple of only 3 times the cash flow! A 10% down payment of $30,500 returns $52,963 in the first year after debt payments! To further cement the stability of this acquisition opportunity, the current owner has offered to finance 10% of the purchase price as a show of good faith in the ongoing success of the business. This is an excellent opportunity for a first-time buyer, a residential cleaning service looking to expand into commercial work without adding a ridiculous amount of overhead fees, or a cleaning service in the surrounding areas of Omaha wanting to expand geographically. Not only does this business have an established team that operates like a well-oiled machine and an excellent profit margin, they have room for continued growth moving forward. Growth opportunities include establishing a marketing presence as their primary route for new clients is via word-of-mouth as well as expanding their current geographic service area.

    PRICE $305,000 CASH FLOW $98,264

  • Staffing Support for Military & Federal Agencies – Diversified Positions

     

    This business provides staffing & labor for military branches and federal agencies such as the Navy, Air force, DOT, DOL, and DOD. They recruit and place personnel in very diversified positions including administration (receptionists, data entry, IT support, training leads, and program managers to name a few). Their highly trained staff is made up of 1 Controller, 1 In House Counsel serving as HR and Foreign Security Officer, 1 Business Development Representative, and 3 Admin, along with roughly 70 billable contract staff. Of the services provided, administrative support makes up 50% of their services, program management is 15%, Logistics makes up 30%, and IT is 5%. This business operation is very similar to a staffing agency.

     

    While there are two owners currently, one is basically just oversight and would not need a replacement moving forward, and the other is willing to stay on board for 3-4 years post-close to ensure a smooth and successful transition and ongoing growth.  Overall growth opportunities include expanding on the current potential for IT contracts, a great opportunity for a tech business to expand their services and expand their client base into the government sector. The working capital of nearly $400,000 will be given to the buyer and, with the low equipment needed, capital expenditure is nil.

     

    Priced at $2,795,000, this business is perfectly positioned for a buyer to step in and continue the already consistent year over year growth trends.  As a show of good faith, the current owners are willing to carry 20% of the financing. This is to help prove their vested interest in the ongoing success of the company.

     

    PRICE $2,795,000 CASH FLOW $627,203

  • Port Logistics & Short Haul with Double Digit Growth

     

    Revenue has doubled between 2021-2022 and has grown 4x over the last four years (2019-2022) at this port logistics and short haul company! By definition, Port Drayage is the transport of freight from an ocean port to a destination, also described as transporting goods over short distances (aka the first mile). This makes up 96% of their revenue, while the other 4% is intermodal, which is rail, when they use 53 ft. trailers for local pickup and delivery. This business boasts an incredible 85% repeat client base, which is made up primarily of manufacturers. The majority of products being handled are housewares and household cleaning products. Their team is made up of 50+ employees, including 1 Operations Manager, 1 Sales Director, 1 Fleet Manager, 1 HR & Recruiting, 3 Accounting, 1 Leasing Manager, 2 Dispatchers, 2 Customer Service Reps, 30 Drivers, and Mechanics.

    The owner is part time and has very little client interaction and handles general oversight of the team. The goal is to find a strategic buyer who can handle the impressive growth the company is seeing. To ensure a successful transition, the owner is willing to stay on board for 3-5 years post-close. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the business, the owner is also open to both 10% seller financing and a 10% equity roll! Upon closing, a buyer would also receive over $6.5M in assets, including $3.5M in working capital, making this deal over 90% collateralized.

    Priced at $7,200,000 this business has a well-established team and chain of command for a new owner to easily step into. This acquisition opportunity also comes with enough stability and a long enough transition period for new ownership to implement different growth opportunities like an active marketing schedule or focused outside sales tactics to expand the current client base via referrals or cold contacts for even further growth.

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $2,425,293

  • Sourcing & Location of Materials for Municipal Road Work

    This business sources materials from national manufacturers & vendors, processes submittals for review & approval, releases materials & schedule delivery, and processes & tracks billings in a timely manner. They are a bulk material supplier & procurement company that provides services for municipal job sites where Prime Contractors are performing utility and bridge installations, including ductile/concrete pipe, precast storm drainage & utility structures, cast iron manholes, and inlet frames/covers. The team includes 1 VP, 1 Controller, 1 Estimator, and 2 Administrative Specialists. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. There have been three years of growth in revenue, going from $17 Million in 2020 to $23 Million in 2022! There is over $4.5M in contract receivables, which a buyer would take over on day of close. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the current owner is willing to roll equity and hold a promissory note for up to 20% of the total price. He is also happy to stay on board for 1-2 years post close to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    After building this business and operating in this industry for 20 years, the current owner is ready for a change of pace and is interested in exploring the next chapter of his life. New ownership can expect to step into a stable investment with three locations, including a primary location in Delaware and satellite locations in Georgia and Florida.

     

    Priced at $4,700,000 this business has an established business operation with over $1.1M in assets and enough stability for a new owner to step in and continue operating the business as is.  This opportunity also affords new owners enough flexibility to change things up and try out some new growth routes.  

    PRICE $4,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,275,044

  • Salons Suites with 44 Spaces: Absentee owned

    This absentee owned business offers small-scale spa-based business owners the opportunity to run their business out of a well trafficked location with amenities including well-maintained space, business partnership opportunities, educational workshops through the franchise, and a complimentary concierge service. This salon suite franchise business has a loyal and established tenant base including multiple customers that have been with the business since its origins in 2015. This business is fiercely focused on client services because they know that as the host of a multitude of businesses, their name is intertwined with all their customers’ branding. The location for this business is a 10,000 square feet facility in West Hartford, CT with 44 suites for different clients to utilize. The current owner is looking to sell due to recent health issues coming to light. He has a passive role in the business which includes checking in with tenants as preferred and he likes to purchase everyone lunch once a month. New ownership would not need to hire a replacement and could easily step into this role.

    This business is unique in its ability to not only provide business owners an opportunity to live their dream without worrying about the details of running a business, but also the sense of comradery it evokes in customers. This establishment has created a major networking opportunity for businesses and a community of likeminded individuals working to build their dreams. New ownership could expand this community in a few ways. The current location has 1,000 sq. ft. that has not been converted into suites but could be. A buyer could also utilize the excellent reputation and longstanding clients to expand into an additional location.

    Priced at $530,000, A 10% down payment of $53,000 returns $143,976 in the first year after debt payments! This unique business has little local competition and is the prime choice for new and returning clients alike. Often, customers that have left their location to work in a separate boutique have returned for the lowered overhead costs and responsibilities as well as the individuality and community offered.

    PRICE $530,000 CASH FLOW $222,697

  • B2B Wholesale & Logistics with Owner to Carry 30%

     

     

    This wholesale & distribution business has Sellers open to remaining on board for 4 years and are willing to do a 30% carry or equity roll combo for a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. With boosting sales of $29MM in 2021 the business is servicing clients in the B2B space. They have two primary client types of Small Wholesalers & direct Shop Owners. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to totally legally sell across state lines. The business is operating out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Orange County and has a strong team of about 40 individuals who are experts in this industry. This includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, as this is all outsourced. They have unparalleled growth from 11 million to nearly 30 million over the last 24 months! This company focuses mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other much smaller wholesalers which makes up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business directly to shop owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes.

    Their services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaging & fulfillment, and arranging logistics, though that is outsourced to 3rd party freight companies. The current owners recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving toa distribution center twice the size to handle the growth, and they brought on Delta8, along with other unique products to continue being the industry leader. A buyer will be able to enjoy the spoils of this recent focus, but they will also have multiple opportunities to continue this growth trajectory. Note from the seller: “In response to any concerns regarding Vapes. Inhale-able products have gone from roughly 80% of sales last year to closer to 30% as we pivoted towards the edible products in 2022. This limits exposure to possible Inhale-able product legislation.” Currently there are 35 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 6-9 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. Priced at $42,000,000, the seller is offering a combination of Promissory Note and Equity Roll for a total of 30% if desired by the buyer. This is a sign of good faith in the business continuing successfully. The 4.1 multiple on a business boasting a 2-year average $8,559,125 in cash flow, a 36% profit margin is a very fair ask, as they are looking for a strategic buyer for growth.

    This fulfilment, wholesale, and distribution business has 4 subsidiaries, each with a unique product and target consumer. The products range from legalized low dose CBD to natural consumables. This market provides an alternative to western medicine and has helped users manage their pain without the fear of an addiction. The use of these products/alternative is on the rise and has helped people with Alzheimer’s Disease, Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS), Crohn’s Disease, Epilepsy and Seizures, Glaucoma, Multiple Sclerosis and Muscle Spasms, Severe and Chronic Pain, Severe Nausea or Vomiting caused by Cancer Treatment. There are several health benefits, as it is better for you than alcohol, helps to calm anxiety, and assists with PTSD. Individual states are continually expanding the legality of hemp and nicotine-based products, which allows for organic growth. The owner also sits on a major lobbying board that campaigns Congress constantly. As the health benefits of hemp and cannabis products continue to be shared, the client base for this business continues to grow. The goal for selling at this time is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen and who may want to grow into manufacturing, bringing it in house to enhance profit margins.

     

    PRICE $42,000,000 CASH FLOW $10,356,976

  • Niche Rental Fleet of Directional Drills – Growth with Infrastructure Bill

    With a location in Phoenix, Arizona and in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to rent to Prime Contractors, foundation companies, and infrastructure GC’s throughout the Southwest. Over $4M in backlog and $3.6M in their sales pipeline, this Industrial drilling equipment business is on track to have an amazing 2023. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright. Established over 15 years ago, this wellknown business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. With nearly $8 Million in assets the buyers’ loan is 100% Collateralized! With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The team consists of industry experts including the COO/Sales manager, a Project and Operations Manager, Accounting and Sales Representative, Office Administrator, a Lead Mechanic plus his Technician, a Yard Manager and Technician Consultant. The current owner only spends 15 hours a week in the business with the role of general oversite and is offering up to a 2-year transition period.

    Priced at $9,975,000 this business is ready for new ownership to step in and enjoy continued growth. The current owner believes in the business’s onward & upward revenues and, as a show of this faith and to mitigate the risk for future ownership, the seller has offered to carry a 20% Seller note and/or Equity Roll. Opportunities for growth include expanding into the Mining Sector, Electrical Sector, International Market, Casing Manufacturing and Distributorships for other product lines. They could easily add 3-5 new product lines in a short amount of time. The newly signed Infrastructure bill will allow organic growth making this opportunity recession-proof.

    PRICE $9,975,000 CASH FLOW $2,075,675

  • Managed Services for IT

     

    This IT company offers managed services such as server architecture and design, Microsoft office 360, system backups and restorations, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services as an add on service for current clients. Based on the first half of the year, and their consistent growth pattern, this company is expected to have an annualized cash flow of over $2M! The purchase of this business not only includes an excellent reputation for customer service, but also an established and efficient team consisting of 7 W2 employees including 2 Sales Associates, 3 IT Engineers, and 2 office administrators. Their current client base has consisted of 85% repeat customers annually thanks to not only their high levels of vested ongoing customers but also their ability to cross advertise to varying clientele. The owner of this cloud and IT management service has full faith in the continued success of this business and to show his vested interest in the operation has offered to carry or roll equity of 30% as a sign of good faith in the continued success of the business. This offer, which is far above the market average of carrying 10% total, is on top of the presented 2-year transition period even though the current owner’s responsibilities of general oversite and aiding the team could easily be absorbed by the skilled staff.  

     

    Established in 2011, this business is located in Omaha, NE. Their current service area is primarily throughout Eastern NE, but they have the potential for worldwide clients. New ownership has countless possibilities for further growth, or the chance to relax and enjoy the current organic growth path the team is on as 2022 is set to be their best year yet with an annualized revenue of over $9M and a 21% profit margin. 

     

    Priced at $8,900,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the lucky new owners. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service or geographically expanding the customer base outside of Eastern Nebraska. 

    PRICE $8,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,953,071

  • Refrigerated Food Transportation & Distribution with Consistently Reliable Demand

    This transportation and distribution business operates in an industry that is continually high in demand as they handle food products that require a refrigerated and/or climate-controlled environment. This consistency has led to the business seeing continual year over year growth in their gross sales, including in 2020 when many companies struggled to continue their operation. This company boasts an impressive 85% repeat customer base and over 30 years of experience in their industry. While they primarily handle food transportation, they also offer warehousing services which makes up 10% of their annual revenue. There is an abundance of space allotted for physical expansion in their 20,000 square foot facility – 18,800 sq. ft. of this space is for warehousing, with 1,200 sq. ft. being utilized as an office space. Having been extremely well established, this business has accumulated an excellent reputation and industry leading staff. Their team is made up of 28 employees: 3 team leads, 2 dispatchers, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, and 6 warehouse workers. This full team allows them to self-perform all of their deliveries and eliminates any need for outside contractors.

     

    The purchase of this business includes over $1.3M in assets, including nearly $700K in vehicles and equipment, along with $600K in working capital. The services provided are 100% B2B, serving food production companies all over the US.  Some of these clients have been around since shortly after the company’s inception in 1989!  Even with the heavy percentage of repeating clients, their annual revenue is widely distributed across several different clients, resulting in minimal customer concentration. They also consistently add new clients to the mix as well, allowing for year over year growth in revenue over the last several years. 

     

    While both owners do have some involvement in the business, both are committed to seeing the business continue successfully and would be willing to stay on for 1-3 years post-close.  During this time, they will train and transition the business to new ownership, while also finding and training any replacement needed. To further demonstrate their vested dedication in the ongoing success of this business, they are willing to offer a seller carry rate of 15%, which is above the industry standard of 10%.

     

    Priced at $3,415,000, this business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth to build on their current long-standing legacy.

     

    PRICE $3,415,000 CASH FLOW $854,730

  • Pipe Fitting & Plumbing for Commercial Clients

     

    Based in Detroit, Michigan, this well-established business is centrally located between Ann Arbor, Flint, Detroit, and Toledo. The company comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 field technicians, 2 estimators, 1 bookkeeper, and 1 admin. This business has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers in a variety of industries including the industrial sector, the healthcare field, and municipal clients. Services that are offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipefitting (25% of service base). The master plumbing license is not held by current ownership but instead is held by one of the team members. This business is for sale at an extremely low multiple of 2.95 times the cash flow! This is because the current owner is looking for a strategic partner to grow the business further and is planning to stay on with the business for 2-3 years to assist in this anticipated growth and ensure a smooth transition. This plumbing and piping business is primed for new ownership, with the projected $1,000,000 in backlog and $600,000 of new projects in their pipeline to be bid on. The current owner is active in the business overseeing estimates and visiting job sites once a week.

     

    The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, with the remaining space dedicated to the office for $2,250 per month. There is plenty of room to expand operations both in the amount of space currently leased and in the opportunities that a buyer could easily take advantage of to see an ongoing development. With their exponentially high rate of return clients, an added marketing or advertising campaign could be expected to result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A well-planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path of growth.

     

    Priced at $1,025,000 the purchase of this company includes all the assets that new ownership will need to continue and grow the current business operation. This includes vehicles, equipment, tools, trailer, and a working capital of $247,709 which, altogether, add up to be valued at $588,297.

     

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • Design and Mail Marketing Company: Established 30 Years

    This medical mailer design and fulfillment business produces a specific niche product necessary to its industry for donation collection. This is well illustrated by their 300+ current clients in the medical, nonprofit, and dental fields. This excellent reputation, coupled with their top-notch work ethic, has led to many of their top clients continually returning for 10+ years. This mid-sized establishment has been servicing and creating business partnerships within the Omaha area for over 30 years. They can remain flexible on jobs that bigger companies would not be able to accept and skilled enough to be more efficient and reliable than smaller firms. Thanks to their skilled and established staff of 18 employees which include 2 Managers, a senior customer service representative, 8 production workers, 2 maintenance workers, their services can be utilized for a range of products including educational seminars and conference. To fill the consistent and diverse needs of these clients, the business purchase includes over $330,000 work of assets which collateralizes 63% of the bank loan needed.

     

    In addition to current services provided, the firm has room to grow outside of traditional printing jobs by utilizing staff’s current ability to handle layout, online marketing, and shipping services to expand further into the online field that can often be preferred in today’s market. The current owner is willing to assist with a smooth transition by offering at least one year of training which could also be used to assist in hiring and training an in store general manager if new ownership would prefer a hands-off management style.

     

    With a purchase price of $440,000 and a down payment of $44,000, a buyer would see a 634% return on investment of $278,938 in the first year after debt payments! This business is well set for a new owner to step in and continue the incredible legacy that has been built over the years. 

    PRICE $440,000 CASH FLOW $345,743

  • Commercial Cleaning on 4 Islands

     

    The current owner of this full-service Janitorial Company has offered a $586,066 discount on the Fair Market Value of this business due to his need to move. This custodial business has been valuated at a low 2.8 multiple in addition to the aforementioned fair market discount, making this an excellent deal for buyers and the current owner has put forward a show of good faith by offering 12.5% seller financing to sweeten the deal. Approximately 95% of their clients are repeat clients, these 27+ repeat commercial clients include some of the largest entities in Hawaii as well as a few industrial agricultural companies. Since 2005 this Hawaii based commercial janitorial establishment has been able to establish an excellent reputation by offering their services paired with a focus on their customer’s needs. With four locations, one on each of Hawaii’s most populated islands (Kauai, Oahu, Maui, Molokai), this business benefits from excellent name recognition, resulting in repeat clients and little need for advertising. The increase of cleanliness and hygienic standards has helped to increase revenue which has been maintained through 2022, as companies, and employees, have a greater appreciation and demand for a clean and sanitary workplace. Their experienced general managers and technicians are self-sufficient, helping to generate over $2.9 million in sales in 2021, leaving the owner with minimal responsibilities.

     

    Their Green Seal certification ensures the highest quality standards in cleaning practices, instilling a high level of trust between this cleaning business and their repeat clientele. They also have the exclusive license in Hawaii to clean one of America’s most popular drapery brands. Between their Green Seal certification and their drapery cleaning license, they can provide exclusive services that cannot be found anywhere else in Hawaii. A new owner will have the flexibility to continue to run the business as is or expand as desired into the residential sector or to other Hawaiian Islands.

     

    Priced at $1,850,000, this business will produce $367,047 after debt payments in the first year! Any potential buyer can feel comfortable knowing that the current owner will offer a one-year training/transition period to assist in learning the ropes of contract renewals and management on multiple islands.

    PRICE $1,850,000 CASH FLOW $637,586

  • Environmental Inspections and Sampling – Commercial Clients

     

    Located in Monroe Louisiana, this Environmental inspection and sampling business offers vital services including asbestos abatement (30%), asbestos air monitoring (20%), asbestos inspection (20%), water sampling (20%), mold sampling (5%), and lead inspections (5%). With the abundance of services offered, their commercial clients include banks and schools with some commercial contracts and residential work within municipalities. With a diverse services list and over 40 years of experience, a wide variety of clients are brought on to benefit from the work of the specialist staff. They complete work in three states – Arkansas, Mississippi, and Louisiana. This Mold, Lead and Asbestos Inspection company has the ability to train & license people for asbestos in house, though this has not been heavily pursued and can be seen as a growth opportunity. This company has maintained a 21% profit margin year over year, and included in the sale is over $240k in assets, including several trucks, trailers, an XRF analyzer, and other equipment. While the seller does assist with bidding, the employees on staff are trained to do so as well and can absorb this responsibility with ease. The seller was in and out in 2020 due to a cancer diagnosis (now in remission), and will train and transition a new owner 6 months to 1 year.

    Their location includes an office, 7 total storage facilities, equipment shed, and covered parking area (all at the same location). The seller does own the real estate and is willing to rent it back to the next owner for $2,500/month. This amount has been accounted for and adjusted in the provided cash flow. At a price of $495,000, and a down payment of $49,500, a buyer would expect to see a return of $57,627 in the first year after debt payments!

     

    PRICE $495,000 CASH FLOW $131,149

  • Moving Company with Diversity in Corporate, Military, And Residential Packing, Hauling, or Storing

    This moving company has been serving Oregon and Washington for 2 decades expanding in over 10 strategic locations. Their services range from office/business moving, contracted military moves, some residential; they also offer packing/crating and warehousing in their storage sites. Consistently growing between 5-10% in revenue is attributed to their very strong organization chart of a P.T. resident CFO, leadership team and regional managers. This allows for passive ownership with the current owner only needing to be present for 2 meetings per month as all of his roles have been absorbed for the last several years. Conservatively projecting $31,000,000 in revenue this year, they will earn 14% profit margin from the clear processes and procedures their divisions have in place. These include call centers, sales, marketing and IT, and drivers.

     

    The business has recently started a mobile pod division, allowing them to provide further services to different types of clients and continue the overall growth.  Other opportunities include small, inexpensive acquisitions to expand the territory, also they are adding server farm moving and hauling. With their excellent reputation as well as their existing client base and locations they have a service area spanning across local, interstate, and international clients. At a purchase price of $26,000,000, there is an option for the seller to not only provide a 10% seller carry, but to also retain 15% in equity if desired. This is being done to show the vested interest in the ongoing success of the business post-close.  

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $4,340,000

  • White-Collar Staffing Firm with Focus on Accounting

    The seller of this white-collar staffing firm is on the hunt for a strategic buyer that can continue to grow the business. In order to make the deal more appealing to this strategic buyer, the seller is willing to carry 30% of the purchase! With services including staffing for CPAs, Accountants, and HR Professionals, the client base for this business is made up of accounting firms and private businesses looking to fill CPA, CFO, Bookkeeping, and HR positions. Their services are made up of 60% permanent placements and 40% temporary workers. While they are located in Kansas City, MO, this business’s client base – made up of 80% repeat customers – is dispersed nationwide! Their focused and driven team includes 17 Employees: 1 Controller/Office Manager, 1 VP, 11 Recruiters, 2 Account Managers, and 2 Administrative workers. The teams ongoing hard work, coupled with the business’s streamlined operation, has led to continued year over year growth in both revenue and cash flow. In 2021, this business had a gross revenue of $5.9MM and so far in 2022 has improved this revenue significantly having made $6.5MM through October alone! Showing support of the business’s upcoming continual growth is their current work-in-progress estimation of over 180 open jobs valued at over $2MM! This business has exponential room for even further growth after the purchase. With $1.2MM in assets included in purchase, this establishment comes with everything needed to maintain both the current operations and to expand into the various unutilized growth opportunities. Utilizing their long-standing reputation as a professional and industry leading staffing firm to expand into the engineering and architectural or legal recruiting fields would be a natural next step for a buyer.

     

    The current owner of this firm primarily handles the management and mentoring of the sales team. They are willing to stay on with the business for 5-7 years after sale and this is entirely negotiable depending on the needs of the buyer as the primary concern for this business is finding the right owner with a driven, growth focused skillset. Priced at $9,600,000, the current owner has offered to carry 30% of the purchase via a combined promissory note and equity roll to establish their vested interest in the ongoing success of the business after sale. Having been established over 35 years, a strategic owner could build on the existing client base and reputation in a wide variety of outlets. Are you a large staffing firm looking to expand into the professional market? Or perhaps looking to build up your client base, client retention rate, or customer relations? This could be your best opportunity!

    PRICE $9,600,000 CASH FLOW $2,346,249

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Upstate New York Environmental Services

     

    This upstate New York company provides environmental services regionally and has generally low inventory, as everything needed is purchase based on the job at hand.  This company provides asbestos removal, lead remediation, and fireproofing services.  They are consistently seeing year over year growth and hit over $8M in revenue in 2021!  They have been established in upstate New York since 2012.

     

    Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant. 

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Priced at $898,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $147,250 in the first year after debt payments – a 131% return on investment! Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

    PRICE $898,000 CASH FLOW $262,089

  • 61% Profit Margin at Salt Lake City Area IT Services Company

     

    This Salt Lake City area IT services company boasts a massive 61% profit margin! Along with providing network infrastructure services, this company also provides the necessary equipment and software their clients need: servers, storage, workstations, security software, virtualization software, etc. Services include firewall implementation & management, endpoint security, ransomware protection, data protection, disaster recovery, business continuity, instant virtualization, and proactive endpoint monitoring and management. The company utilizes specialized software, such as Datto RMM, Datto, BCDR, Autotask PSA, Auvik, Lionguard Scale Computing, DataCore, Windows, Citrix Apps, Citrix Hypervisor, Citrix ADC, and Sophos Central Endpoint. The company boasts high profit margins and has seen year-over-year growth in sales since 2018. In 2020, sales of goods and SaaS accounted for 41% of business while human labor services accounted for 59%.

     

    The owner handles the day-to-day operations, while the two part-time 1099 employees assist with technology health checks, running weekly & monthly reports for clients, adding content to the website, and helping with quotes. The business is run from a home office or on site at client locations; no commercial office space is needed.

     

    Priced at $920,000, a 10% down payment of $92,000 returns $145,681 in the first year after debt payments – a 158% return on investment! With a solid customer base intact and an abundance of documentation on each client, a transition would be seamless for an already existing IT management company that is looking to grow the own client list and revenue.

     

    PRICE $910,000 CASH FLOW $330,193

  • Staffing Firm for Temp-to-Hire

    This staffing agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their diverse client base in the professional and clerical fields. This includes full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing and payrolling services. These services can be utilized for part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis, with a turnaround time of 2 weeks to 2 months. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. Located in Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

     

    Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Priced at $540,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts. 

    PRICE $540,000 CASH FLOW $135,530

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Commercial AC & Refrigeration Repair & Installation Service

    Established in 1997, this HVAC company located on Maui is known as the #1 refrigeration and air-conditioning company. Well known in the area for their excellent and prompt service and customer care, their excellent team consists of 16 employees, including trusted technicians, office staff, and installation managers. Due to the excellent reputation and efficient team, the owner of this successful HVAC company enjoys 3-4 months out of state each year! The business’s services are equally split between equipment service and installation. Their client base is made up of 90% commercial clients including condos, shopping centers, restaurants, and office buildings. They also service premium private residents. While the business had a small dip in revenue in 2020 due to covid, with a gross revenue of $4.8M in 2021 this business has already beat their pre-pandemic numbers and 2022 has continued to show growth and is expected to have a revenue of $5.2M.

     

    Having been in business for over 20 years, the owner has been able to train personnel to manage the business in his absence for 3-4 months per year and his current responsibilities consist of financial oversite and general management. To show vested interest in the business and assist with a smooth transition of ownership, the owner has offered a 1-year training period. Operations are managed from a large 6,000 square feet location in the Kahului area. The office has 2,000 square feet of space and the remaining 4,000 square feet is dedicated to their warehouse and sheet metal shop.

     

    Priced at $2,850,000, there is tremendous growth potential for a new owner. The company does almost no marketing; their only advertisement efforts being from their website and ads on their trucks. Over the years, all of their business has come from word of mouth due to the excellent service provided. A 12.5% down payment of $356,250 returns $410,069 in the first year after debt payments – a 115% return on investment! The current owner has also offered a 12.5% equity roll or financing to demonstrate his faith and continued investment in the success of the business. 

    PRICE $2,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,357,546

  • Multi Location Urgent Care with niche focus in Physicals

    Buyer does not need to be a doctor; the owner is passive and lives over 2 hours away! Their team of 19 includes 1 Business Development Manager, 3 Providers (Nurse Practitioners), 3 Billing Reps, 10 Medical Assistants, and 2 X-Ray Techs. For over 15 years, this multi-location practice has been providing care for workers compensation accidents, treating on the job injuries, DOT physicals, drug testing, and pre-placement screening in Elkhart, Indiana. The business development manager has brought on 90 new clients since 2020! Their repeat client base is businesses and employers in the area. The current owner only works 10 hours/week via phone and he is still willing to stay on board to train and transition for 2 years after closing to ensure a smooth transaction. There is little to no competition in the area, outside of expensive hospitals. This practice does not have any hospital affiliations.

    A 3rd location is fully equipped and ready to open as soon as the staff is all trained. With the purchase, a buyer would be getting in receipt of 2 vehicles, medical equipment, office furnishings, and A/R. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner will carry or hold an equity roll of 12.5%. Boasting a profit margin of 50%, year over year growth, and over $1.5M in cash flow, the numbers speak for themselves! Priced at $7,050,000, this business is a passive opportunity with exponential growth opportunities requiring minimal additional resources to be expended.

    PRICE $7,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,680,388

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • International PR and Event Firm with Passive Ownership

     

    This international company has been around since 1995, and in that time has been able to establish a diversified clientele base made up of only 30% local and regional clients and 70% international clients! This has been possible thanks to their 64 experienced staff members including 5 management board members and 33FT and 26PT workers operating in graphic design, client relations, media analysis, web services, social media, administration, editing, and outreach. With this excellent chain of command, the owner has been able to transition to a completely passive ownership with no billable hours. This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency currently has a profit margin of 29%. The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management. 

     

    The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well. Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of 64. This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease. 

     

    At a purchase price of $1,500,000 and a down payment of $300,000, a buyer would see a return of $308,766 in the first year after debt payments! This business is established and ready for a new owner to step in!

    PRICE $1,500,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

Private Equity Group (52)

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Painting Contractor with 85% Reccurring Clients

    This New York based industrial painting company receives approximately 40 projects a year in municipal infrastructure! Boasting an experienced team of over 90 employees, including 3 project managers, 8 foremen, more than 75 painters and 6 administrative employees, 15 years of quality work has resulted in strong relationships with general contractors and a competitive bidding process that brings in $500K - $1M per project. Included in the purchase is a current backlog of $73M and $2.8M of assets, which includes safety equipment, rigging, and supplies, plus $680K in trucks and trailers. The company’s services include industrial painting and site preparation for jobs such as bridges, tunnels, and transit stations. The company also offers lead abatement and shield integration, services which keep workflow high during the winter months. Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings. Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to stay on for 20 hours a week during an 18 month transition period. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing.  The sellers are willing to roll equity for 12.5% of the purchase price, then do a seller carry for another 12.5% for a total of 25%, as a sign of good faith in the business.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,213,361

  • Property Management with 29% Profit Margin

    Serving Milwaukee to Kenosha for over 15 years, this property management company has a strong client base made up of Property Investors, focused in multifamily apartments.  They take pride in having less than a 3% vacancy rate; plus there are contracts to onboard an additional 3,000 units.  This is the main reason for the sale – the current owner would like to bring on a strategic buyer for the upcoming growth.  He would roll equity for up to 20% as a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company.  They have a sister company that performs all maintenance and can fully rehab any units needing tenant improvement, making this property management firm unique.  The well-developed leadership team includes a CFO, one Senior Vice President handing property management, and another Senior Vice President controlling the construction division.  There are also 3 Property Managers, 4 in Maintenance, and 1 Office Admin.

     

    The owner oversees his leadership team and will do some site sourcing, as he still finds this enjoyable.  His teams handles the day-to-day operations.  The acquisition includes about $450K in assets and boasts a healthy sales pipeline with growth and projects in Austin, Texas.  Asking $3,300,000 with only 10% down from the buyer and 70% from a lender.  This streamlined property management business early a 29% profit margin could be yours!

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $770,867

  • Expert Witness Placement & Strategy: Law Firm Consultants

    Consultants for law firms where they place and prepare expert witnesses for litigation & trial. The buyer does not need to be an attorney ass the current owner is not one. This firm’s client base are top, usually recognizable companies or that need assistance finding expert witnesses, case analysis, witness reports, and trial strategy & preparation. Over the years, this operation has been able to create a network of experts to consult with and has a stable team of 12; made up of mostly attorneys, law professors, MBAs, and accountants. The personnel of the firm work remotely, meaning they have extremely low overhead costs! This drives their 44% profit margin and allows them to take on clients across the United States and internationally. The current owner has some roles in business development and staff oversight. He has recently been offloading more of his client facing roles in order to prepare for a smooth transition. Seller has offered a transition period ranging from 1 to 2 years. Additionally, the Owner is willing to seller finance or roll equity of up to 15% as a sign of good faith.

     

    Priced at $6,200,000 this business offers a strategic buyer the opportunity to expand their practice or this opportunity for an individual with legal experience looking to start their own practice. This consulting firm has a stable team, client base, and network that offer extreme growth opportunities moving forward. Options vary and include creating a division of the business to handle opposition research in order to find contradictions or indiscretions that would assist with discrediting the opposition’s expert witness, expanding geographically to focus on more contracts outside of the US, working with class action cases, and taking on cases for the International Trademark Association.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,267,441

  • 13 Architects in Toronto Based Firm

     

    The focus of their firm is to guide clients through unique architecture that is both elegant and intelligent, along with lead planning, design, and working alongside clients in the construction phase. Located in Toronto, this architecture firm’s staff primarily services clients in Ontario but have worked in the US because of their expertise in casinos, which a buyer could reimplement easily, as they still have client connections and resources. This architecture firm with nearly 35 years of experience specializes in the entertainment and gaming sector (60%), a large portion of their services are related to designing complex casinos, a service that not all firms are able to efficiently provide. This firm also handles condos (15%), commercial and industrial spaces (10%), corporate interiors (10%), and luxury residential work (5%). The team includes 21 employees, including a CFO, general manager, 9 registered architects, 4 technical draftsmen, and 3 architect interns. As a show of vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owners will offer an extended transition period of 3-5 years.

    The price of $9,300,000 includes a 10% seller carry, along with a 10% equity roll to show good faith in the business continuing successfully post-close. Over the last 5 years, the business is boasting an incredible 45% profit margin! With the purchase, a buyer would also be receiving $439,756 in working capital. This firm is back to pre-Covid levels with revenue, and a 2022 cash flow of over $2.3 Million!

    PRICE $9,300,000 CASH FLOW $2,373,790

  • Most Well Run Soft and Hard Landscaping Business with $10M in Revenue

     

    This company is stacked with 3 Divisional Managers, an entire administrative staff plus 20 crews consisting of 50 skilled laborers. This is not your typical landscape “Mom and Pop” type of business! The company has $4.7M in assets which makes the buyers bank loan 100% collateralized! They have 5 years of year-over-year growth and the trailing twelve months of sales is over 10 million with 3 million in committed contracts for 2023. Their hardscape services consisting of retaining walls & pavers makes up 40% of their revenue. The pool division is 35% which includes pool design, landscape and water features. The remaining 25% is in reoccurring weekly maintenance for HOA’s, and both residential and commercial clients. This division has 800+ high-end residential homeowners on their list and boasts a 98% retention rate! After more than 20 years in business unfortunately, the owner is selling to have more time to focus on some health concerns in his family. He has offered a transition period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transfer of ownership for both the buyer and his staff.

     

    The current owner has offered to carry or roll equity for up to 20% of this purchase to establish his ongoing vested interest in the success of the business and as a show of good faith. All of the certifications needed (licensed contractor, sprinkler contractors, lawn and paving certifications) are held by the business or current employees, not the owner. Priced at $6,800,000 this business has a solid team, client base, and local reputation that any entrepreneur could build with. There is absolutely no marketing in place, all business is based on reputation, and they also have much more capacity with their current location and fleet.

     

    PRICE $6,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,691,487

  • Port Logistics & Short Haul with Double Digit Growth

     

    Revenue has doubled between 2021-2022 and has grown 4x over the last four years (2019-2022) at this port logistics and short haul company! By definition, Port Drayage is the transport of freight from an ocean port to a destination, also described as transporting goods over short distances (aka the first mile). This makes up 96% of their revenue, while the other 4% is intermodal, which is rail, when they use 53 ft. trailers for local pickup and delivery. This business boasts an incredible 85% repeat client base, which is made up primarily of manufacturers. The majority of products being handled are housewares and household cleaning products. Their team is made up of 50+ employees, including 1 Operations Manager, 1 Sales Director, 1 Fleet Manager, 1 HR & Recruiting, 3 Accounting, 1 Leasing Manager, 2 Dispatchers, 2 Customer Service Reps, 30 Drivers, and Mechanics.

    The owner is part time and has very little client interaction and handles general oversight of the team. The goal is to find a strategic buyer who can handle the impressive growth the company is seeing. To ensure a successful transition, the owner is willing to stay on board for 3-5 years post-close. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the business, the owner is also open to both 10% seller financing and a 10% equity roll! Upon closing, a buyer would also receive over $6.5M in assets, including $3.5M in working capital, making this deal over 90% collateralized.

    Priced at $7,200,000 this business has a well-established team and chain of command for a new owner to easily step into. This acquisition opportunity also comes with enough stability and a long enough transition period for new ownership to implement different growth opportunities like an active marketing schedule or focused outside sales tactics to expand the current client base via referrals or cold contacts for even further growth.

     

    PRICE $7,200,000 CASH FLOW $2,425,293

  • Infrastructure Renovations for Government with 21 Million in backlog

     

    This firm manages renovations and maintenance for military bases with projects across the West Coast. 50% of which are in Washington State, 40% in Northern California, and 10% in Oregon. Located in Tacoma, WA, they offer diverse services such as upgrades to massive military buildings, replace electric, chillers, plumbing systems, water mains, removal of fuel tanks, and demolition of structures. Clients are 90% Federal/Government and 10% private hire, including the VA, Navy, US Coast Guard, Schools, Army, and Apartments/Condos. There will not be any impact on this business should there be a recession. In fact, due to the newly passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will have organic growth as the bill had many set asides for our military bases. There are typically 20-30 active jobs concurrently.  Of these, 20% are direct hires for a project, while 80% comes from bid invites. Only 25% of the projects are for new infrastructure, with 75% being focused on repairs and renovations of existing structures. The largest project is $11M, the smallest is $9,000, and the median is $2M, showing a diverse range of jobs, several of which are multi-year contracts. They have over $21 million in backlog with more in the pipeline and the conservative projection for 2023 is over $35 million in revenue.

     

    A multi-layer management system is in place where there are about 35 key employees, including a President, CFO, 4 Project Managers, 2 Engineers, 5 Superintendents, 2 Foreman, 5 Estimators, 4 Quality Control, plus Admin, IT, and Assistants. Additionally, there are 85 suppliers and 6,567 subcontractors. Having a well-developed leadership team allows the owner to work remotely.  He spends about 15 hours per week in the business having only 3 direct reports.  He meets with his President & CFO and consults with the Chief Estimator when needed. The owner describes himself as having no day-to-day role and that he is more strategic. He is willing to stay up to 5 years post-close and will also offer a promissory note of 15% plus an equity roll of 15% as a sign of good faith. With the purchase, a buyer would receive $1.5M in assets, including working capital and the vehicles and equipment needed to continue successfully. CapEx remains very low at less than $200K per year.

     

    With their experience handling private commercial work, this would be an easy growth opportunity to return to.  In addition to this, the business has licenses to handle jobs on any federal property. With the newly passed US Infrastructure Bill and regular work with the VA/federal contracts, there is no shortage of projects for this company.  Priced at $36,000,000, a buyer is getting no shortage of talent and expansion potential! 

     

    PRICE $36,000,000 CASH FLOW $6,316,952

  • Sourcing & Location of Materials for Municipal Road Work

    This business sources materials from national manufacturers & vendors, processes submittals for review & approval, releases materials & schedule delivery, and processes & tracks billings in a timely manner. They are a bulk material supplier & procurement company that provides services for municipal job sites where Prime Contractors are performing utility and bridge installations, including ductile/concrete pipe, precast storm drainage & utility structures, cast iron manholes, and inlet frames/covers. The team includes 1 VP, 1 Controller, 1 Estimator, and 2 Administrative Specialists. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. There have been three years of growth in revenue, going from $17 Million in 2020 to $23 Million in 2022! There is over $4.5M in contract receivables, which a buyer would take over on day of close. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the current owner is willing to roll equity and hold a promissory note for up to 20% of the total price. He is also happy to stay on board for 1-2 years post close to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    After building this business and operating in this industry for 20 years, the current owner is ready for a change of pace and is interested in exploring the next chapter of his life. New ownership can expect to step into a stable investment with three locations, including a primary location in Delaware and satellite locations in Georgia and Florida.

     

    Priced at $4,700,000 this business has an established business operation with over $1.1M in assets and enough stability for a new owner to step in and continue operating the business as is.  This opportunity also affords new owners enough flexibility to change things up and try out some new growth routes.  

    PRICE $4,700,000 CASH FLOW $1,275,044

  • Apparel Distributor with Manufacturing in Mexico

    Conservatively projecting to hit $17M in annual revenue, this company is primed for a buyer who can continue this growth pattern.  They pride themselves on what they call “Elevated Everyday Apparel,” which they design, oversee manufacturing, and then distribute to their clients.  The clients are highly reputable and recognizable, including Nordstroms, Burlington, PacSun, and as of last quarter, they are now rolling out Target!  The company has manufacturers in Mexico, Guatemala, and China and distribution throughout North America.  They have 10 of their own brands, over 50 licenses, and also do white label for retailers.  The team is well developed with 4 in management/office administration, 7 in art and design, 3 in sales, and 4 in production.

     

    The two owners spend about 25 hours each in the business per week, with Owner 1 overseeing the production and sales team, and Owner 2 working with the art department and merchandising.  One person could easily do both roles.  This replacement salary is accounted for in the cash flow.  As a show of good faith, they are willing to do a combination of promissory note and equity roll for 15%.  With a purchase price of $3,640,000 and a down payment of $364,000, you would see a return of $487,662 after debt payment, a 134% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,640,000 CASH FLOW $1,040,324

  • B2B Wholesale & Logistics with Owner to Carry 30%

     

     

    This wholesale & distribution business has Sellers open to remaining on board for 4 years and are willing to do a 30% carry or equity roll combo for a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. With boosting sales of $29MM in 2021 the business is servicing clients in the B2B space. They have two primary client types of Small Wholesalers & direct Shop Owners. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to totally legally sell across state lines. The business is operating out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Orange County and has a strong team of about 40 individuals who are experts in this industry. This includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, as this is all outsourced. They have unparalleled growth from 11 million to nearly 30 million over the last 24 months! This company focuses mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other much smaller wholesalers which makes up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business directly to shop owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes.

    Their services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaging & fulfillment, and arranging logistics, though that is outsourced to 3rd party freight companies. The current owners recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving toa distribution center twice the size to handle the growth, and they brought on Delta8, along with other unique products to continue being the industry leader. A buyer will be able to enjoy the spoils of this recent focus, but they will also have multiple opportunities to continue this growth trajectory. Note from the seller: “In response to any concerns regarding Vapes. Inhale-able products have gone from roughly 80% of sales last year to closer to 30% as we pivoted towards the edible products in 2022. This limits exposure to possible Inhale-able product legislation.” Currently there are 35 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 6-9 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. Priced at $42,000,000, the seller is offering a combination of Promissory Note and Equity Roll for a total of 30% if desired by the buyer. This is a sign of good faith in the business continuing successfully. The 4.1 multiple on a business boasting a 2-year average $8,559,125 in cash flow, a 36% profit margin is a very fair ask, as they are looking for a strategic buyer for growth.

    This fulfilment, wholesale, and distribution business has 4 subsidiaries, each with a unique product and target consumer. The products range from legalized low dose CBD to natural consumables. This market provides an alternative to western medicine and has helped users manage their pain without the fear of an addiction. The use of these products/alternative is on the rise and has helped people with Alzheimer’s Disease, Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS), Crohn’s Disease, Epilepsy and Seizures, Glaucoma, Multiple Sclerosis and Muscle Spasms, Severe and Chronic Pain, Severe Nausea or Vomiting caused by Cancer Treatment. There are several health benefits, as it is better for you than alcohol, helps to calm anxiety, and assists with PTSD. Individual states are continually expanding the legality of hemp and nicotine-based products, which allows for organic growth. The owner also sits on a major lobbying board that campaigns Congress constantly. As the health benefits of hemp and cannabis products continue to be shared, the client base for this business continues to grow. The goal for selling at this time is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen and who may want to grow into manufacturing, bringing it in house to enhance profit margins.

     

    PRICE $42,000,000 CASH FLOW $10,356,976

  • Roofing Company with 2.4M in Receivables

    This residential roofing business has been in service for over 20 years and they have $2.4M in receivables! they have 2 locations with their main location in Manassas, VA and the second satellite location an hour away, both locations have a General Manager to ensure smooth individual operations. Boasting over $1.45M in cash flow in 2021 in addition to the previously mentioned $2.4M in AR, this opportunity would allow new ownership to continue and grow the business’s current operations. The team consists of 16 employees including 2 office managers, 5 office staff, and 7 sales reps, this roofing business not only has an established chain of command but has also been able to keep their CapEx and Liability low by outsourcing all of the business’s labor. The current owner only focuses on the oversite of sales and even with his minimal involvement in day-to-day activities, he is willing to stay on board with the business for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth transition. The services offered include roof inspection and installation, gutter repair, siding, windows, floors, decks, drywall, and storm restoration which are utilized by over 5,000 clients in Virginia, West Virginia, and Maryland.

     

    In the Northeast U.S., April through September is storm season, which is the busiest time of year for this company. After a hailstorm, there is a 50% chance that a roof will have a leak. They have learned to utilize this information by increasing their cold call and door to door sales to coincide with this optimum business opportunity. Because of this niche market, the business has proven to be pandemic and recession proof.  Their team works with clients’ insurance companies to ensure that customers get the most out of their claim. Coupled with the high levels of customers coming in due to referrals (70%!), and their average online rating of 4.8, this business is primed for growth. Outside of their already incredible client base, there would be easy expansion into commercial and government work as well.

     

    The current owner is willing to carry up to 20% of the $2,800,000 purchase price, to show their established confidence in the company’s ability to continue successfully. A 10% down payment of $280,000 would show a 363% ROI of $1,016,385 in the first year after debt payments!  This fantastic return on investment rate is due to their willingness to sell the business for over $800,000 less than the fair market valuation!

    PRICE $2,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,450,753

  • K-12 & University Focused Architecture Firm with Multiple Locations

    The current owner of this business is looking to not only stay with the business for five years after sale, but has also offered to carry 25% or more! This architecture firm has a focus on higher education and K-12, with 4.1M in backlog, they are poised for an acquisition. The industry average for seller financing is 10%. This owner is open to a 30% carry showing good faith in the ongoing success and the seller’s vested interest in the success of the business after sale. The firm has nearly 20 years of experience under their belt, and their leadership team has been well mentored. The team consists of 31 employees including 2 SVP’s, 1 CFO, several architects, interior designers, and administrators. Based in New York City, this business has been able to accumulate an excellent reputation spurred on by happy clients which has led to 90% repeat clientele. A strategic new owner with experience in architecture and engineering would have 6 years of seller transitioning of the business and a foot into the New York market.

     

    This business currently only has hospital clients making up roughly 10% of their customer base and with their current team, resources, and connections this would be an excellent opportunity for growth without expending unnecessary resources. 

     

    Priced at $4,300,000 this business is primed to return year over year success to anyone in a related industry. Someone that knows how to operate in this field would be able to not only enjoy the expected organic growth pattern brought forward by the world’s focus on education and building new opportunities, but put forth new growth opportunities without having to utilize exponential resources on accumulating additional assets.

    PRICE $4,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,014,009

  • Install and Maintenance of Public Transportation Systems

     

    Established in 2012, this business has an excellent reputation in their area and currently has 13 contracts, which lands their current working progress total at $28 million. Their team includes 50+ members Including a CFO, VP and Superintendent, 1 Senior Director of Project Managers, 5 Project Managers, 11 Electrical Foreman, 17 electricians and apprentices, railroad maintenance staff, 7 Administrative Employees, equipment operators, and warehouse drivers many of which they hired due to their positive relationship with their union (in this region, the union is the ONLY way to work on public opportunities). They work on rail, streetcar, commuter rail, traffic light, cabling, lighting, and communications systems. Their extensive list of services within their transit niche include designing, drilling, installing, repairing, and maintaining above ground and underground public transportation systems. Due to their heavily municipal focused client base, this infrastructure based electrical company is heavily recession resistant, which is evident in the fact the business even saw growth in 2020! In fact, due to the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill, this business will grow significantly as $66B has been set aside for transportation infrastructure work near their Washington and Oregon service area.

     

    The purchase of this business comes with $5.9M in assets including vehicles and equipment, along with working capital of $3M+!  The current owner is looking for a buyer to handle this continual growth as well as to ensure the business is maximizing on its multitude of opportunities.

     

    Priced at $13,950,000, the seller is willing to carry a combined 25% via seller financing and/or equity roll to show good faith in the ongoing success of the company. This establishment, and any potential new ownership, has a new opportunity for focused growth with the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill. There have been multiple infrastructure packages discussed, planned, and/or approved in the area related to public transportation which should be coming to fruition in the near future, creating ongoing opportunities for this business regardless of the status of the economy.

     

    PRICE $13,950,000 CASH FLOW $3,366,766

  • Niche Fabrication & Manufacturing with More Than $11M in Collateral

     

    This niche fabrication & manufacturing company is boasting strong year over year growth with their diverse reoccurring client base. Included with the purchase is over $11M in assets, which over-collateralizes the bank loan by $1.9M! Their clients include a wide range of industries including agriculture, automotive, electrical, medical, lawn & garden, and government. For these clients, they are manufacturing industrial springs, wire forms, and stamping. There was more than 20 million products produced last year! The breakdown of revenue is 42% wire forms, 31% springs, 21% stamping, 4% assembly, 2% misc. Based in the Toronto area, they service both domestic and international clients. Their primary international clients are the United States and Mexico. Combined, revenue from these countries make up 26% of revenue. Their upgraded facility is 46,900 sq. ft. and was built in 2006 to allow for growth. The team of 22 is made up of 5 Supervisors, 1 Shipping Manager, 3 Quality Control Techs, 2 Shipping/Receiving, 1 Office Admin, 5 Set Up Operators, and 5 Machine Operators, not including the owners. The owners are selling as a method of retirement planning, but they are happy to stay on board for 2-4 years post-close to ensure a smooth and successful transition.

    Priced at $9,565,000 this business offers prospective buyers the opportunity to not only purchase a business, but a legacy. In addition to their referral gathering reputation, growth opportunities for new ownership could include implementing or expanding marketing and advertising tactics. The sellers have offered 10% seller financing which shows a vested interest in the business’s continued growth and success in years to come.

    **The Firm Advisors is a consultant to the owner. The Firm Advisors does not represent real estate, nor provide accounting services. The Firm Advisors solely advises on exit strategy planning.

     

    PRICE $9,565,000 CASH FLOW $1,143,080

  • Niche Rental Fleet of Directional Drills – Growth with Infrastructure Bill

    With a location in Phoenix, Arizona and in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to rent to Prime Contractors, foundation companies, and infrastructure GC’s throughout the Southwest. Over $4M in backlog and $3.6M in their sales pipeline, this Industrial drilling equipment business is on track to have an amazing 2023. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright. Established over 15 years ago, this wellknown business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. With nearly $8 Million in assets the buyers’ loan is 100% Collateralized! With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The team consists of industry experts including the COO/Sales manager, a Project and Operations Manager, Accounting and Sales Representative, Office Administrator, a Lead Mechanic plus his Technician, a Yard Manager and Technician Consultant. The current owner only spends 15 hours a week in the business with the role of general oversite and is offering up to a 2-year transition period.

    Priced at $9,975,000 this business is ready for new ownership to step in and enjoy continued growth. The current owner believes in the business’s onward & upward revenues and, as a show of this faith and to mitigate the risk for future ownership, the seller has offered to carry a 20% Seller note and/or Equity Roll. Opportunities for growth include expanding into the Mining Sector, Electrical Sector, International Market, Casing Manufacturing and Distributorships for other product lines. They could easily add 3-5 new product lines in a short amount of time. The newly signed Infrastructure bill will allow organic growth making this opportunity recession-proof.

    PRICE $9,975,000 CASH FLOW $2,075,675

  • Managed Services for IT

     

    This IT company offers managed services such as server architecture and design, Microsoft office 360, system backups and restorations, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services as an add on service for current clients. Based on the first half of the year, and their consistent growth pattern, this company is expected to have an annualized cash flow of over $2M! The purchase of this business not only includes an excellent reputation for customer service, but also an established and efficient team consisting of 7 W2 employees including 2 Sales Associates, 3 IT Engineers, and 2 office administrators. Their current client base has consisted of 85% repeat customers annually thanks to not only their high levels of vested ongoing customers but also their ability to cross advertise to varying clientele. The owner of this cloud and IT management service has full faith in the continued success of this business and to show his vested interest in the operation has offered to carry or roll equity of 30% as a sign of good faith in the continued success of the business. This offer, which is far above the market average of carrying 10% total, is on top of the presented 2-year transition period even though the current owner’s responsibilities of general oversite and aiding the team could easily be absorbed by the skilled staff.  

     

    Established in 2011, this business is located in Omaha, NE. Their current service area is primarily throughout Eastern NE, but they have the potential for worldwide clients. New ownership has countless possibilities for further growth, or the chance to relax and enjoy the current organic growth path the team is on as 2022 is set to be their best year yet with an annualized revenue of over $9M and a 21% profit margin. 

     

    Priced at $8,900,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the lucky new owners. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service or geographically expanding the customer base outside of Eastern Nebraska. 

    PRICE $8,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,953,071

  • Refrigerated Food Transportation & Distribution with Consistently Reliable Demand

    This transportation and distribution business operates in an industry that is continually high in demand as they handle food products that require a refrigerated and/or climate-controlled environment. This consistency has led to the business seeing continual year over year growth in their gross sales, including in 2020 when many companies struggled to continue their operation. This company boasts an impressive 85% repeat customer base and over 30 years of experience in their industry. While they primarily handle food transportation, they also offer warehousing services which makes up 10% of their annual revenue. There is an abundance of space allotted for physical expansion in their 20,000 square foot facility – 18,800 sq. ft. of this space is for warehousing, with 1,200 sq. ft. being utilized as an office space. Having been extremely well established, this business has accumulated an excellent reputation and industry leading staff. Their team is made up of 28 employees: 3 team leads, 2 dispatchers, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, and 6 warehouse workers. This full team allows them to self-perform all of their deliveries and eliminates any need for outside contractors.

     

    The purchase of this business includes over $1.3M in assets, including nearly $700K in vehicles and equipment, along with $600K in working capital. The services provided are 100% B2B, serving food production companies all over the US.  Some of these clients have been around since shortly after the company’s inception in 1989!  Even with the heavy percentage of repeating clients, their annual revenue is widely distributed across several different clients, resulting in minimal customer concentration. They also consistently add new clients to the mix as well, allowing for year over year growth in revenue over the last several years. 

     

    While both owners do have some involvement in the business, both are committed to seeing the business continue successfully and would be willing to stay on for 1-3 years post-close.  During this time, they will train and transition the business to new ownership, while also finding and training any replacement needed. To further demonstrate their vested dedication in the ongoing success of this business, they are willing to offer a seller carry rate of 15%, which is above the industry standard of 10%.

     

    Priced at $3,415,000, this business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth to build on their current long-standing legacy.

     

    PRICE $3,415,000 CASH FLOW $854,730

  • Excavation & Dirt Work for Municipalities: Over Collateralized by $2M

     

    This business currently has over $18M in backlog to be completed by early 2023 and includes assets worth $7M+ which includes $3.6M in working capital. Established in 1979 with a team of 20 core people in place, there is no shortage of trained professionals at hand, including office staff, project managers, and foremen. There are also 30-50 union laborers, who are contracted as needed. This company is frequently selected for both standard and unique paving projects for multiple government organizations, resulting in repeat clientele. The business handles work for some of the largest clients in NYC, including the NYC DOT, Department of Parks & Recreation, NY & NJ Port Authorities, and the Board of Education. Their services include concrete, excavation, asphalt, and paving work. The proof is in the performance with this NYC business as they have never defaulted on a project in their 43-year history. Any potential owner can feel confident knowing they will receive ample training on the ins-and-outs of this successful business The current owners are ready to retire but have a vested interested in the continuing success of this business, to show good faith they are willing to finance 10% as well as hold a 10% Equity Roll.

     

    While one owner is passive, he will continue his favorite part of the job- checking in on work sites in his truck for about an hour a day- for 3+ months after selling. The other owner currently works about 30 hours a week, and will provide training on administrative duties, such as approving financials and payroll, to get the new owner up to speed over the course of 2 to 3 years. Both owners started out on the project team and have worked their way up to ownership in the company, so they will be able to provide all pertinent knowledge of company operations. The business’s pride and eye for detail has led to a stellar reputation & allowed them to soar above competition over the years. 

     

    At a purchase price of $5,900,000, a buyer can expect to see a return of $417,798 in the first year after debt payments. With natural growth opportunities available and a highly trained core staff, there is no limit to what this business could do!

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,483,276

  • Electrical Shop for Municipalities with 20 Million in Backlog

    Established in 1993 and located in NYC, this business operates in all five boroughs consistently offering competitive pricing to obtain both small and large projects. This Commercial Electrical Contracting company focuses on System Installation & Power for municipal projects. This company’s backlog for 2023 currently stands at $20.2Million with a Working Capital valued at $2.9Million. No bank loan is needed to finalize this deal, the seller asks that the new owner would absorb the 3 loans already in existence. The buyer would receive $2,635,000 in Working Capital as a part of the assets of the business, this will make a notable difference in offsetting the debt absorption associated with the purchase. Their services include lighting, power, access control, fire alarms, analytics, system installation, and security systems. This industry leading team works with electrical contractors and large company buildings as well as transportation businesses specializing in rail, bus, and elevator services. With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The current office space is 3,000 sq. ft. with 5-office staff that handle operations and client relations with 2 additional warehouses with over 20 tradesmen.

     

    They specialize in establishing BIM contracts for clients using industry-based software. Using these tools to make the design and installation of electrical projects more efficient and cost effective. The current owner of this commercial electric contracting company handles general oversight of the business and is looking to sell so she can spend time with her terminally ill spouse. The current owner has agreed to stay on for a year to provide a smooth transition and will maintain 20% equity if desired by the buyer. With a down payment of $450,000, a buyer can acquire not only this business, but also their reputation for being dedicated to providing quality and reliable electric work to its clients. Due to the fact that they have been in business for almost 30 years, a majority of their clients are repeat or referrals. This electric company is ready to leave a new owner with an experienced crew and client base that will continue its effective work and legacy. 

    PRICE $4,220,000 CASH FLOW $1,015,788

  • Green Energy with KC Based Solar Power Business

    They have over $3MM in backlog projects expected to be completed in 2023. Established in 2011 this business has a well-established crew consisting of 6 core employees: 1 project manager, 1 project coordinator/client liaison, 2 business development associates, 1 sales manager, and 1 outside sales rep. This solar energy business sells solar power equipment and coordinates installation, they do not self-perform any installation labor. In August of 2022, the Senate passed a bill that would provide major tax credits for renewable energy which would directly benefit the new owner. Additionally, the continued push for green energy will call for organic growth in this industry. This business solely focuses on Solar Power Equipment Sales and Coordination of Installation with no labor or self-preformed installation. Due to their business model, they can work with commercial businesses, industrial municipalities, agricultural farms, nonprofit organizations, and schools. With very low equipment CapEx while allowing them to operate in Missouri, Iowa, Kansas, and Illinois with the potential for regional expansion with emphasis on municipal contracts.

    The current owner actively operates the company, including financial management and some business development but has offered to stay with the company for 2-3 years in order to provide a smooth transition/training period. The current owner is looking to sell this business in order to plan for retirement and is willing to carry 25% of the purchase in order to show good faith in the continued success of this company. Priced at $7,800,000 this business has a great outlook when it comes to scalability as well as vertical growth! A new owner will have everything needed to allow this business to continue to succeed including a diverse client base, a reliable staff, a passionate owner ready to offer years of experience, and continual organic and driven growth opportunities.

    PRICE $7,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,670,114

  • Sports & Playsets for Schools and Residential Outdoor Use

    Established in 1993, this extremely high-quality recreational equipment business is incredibly well known in the Omaha area. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet facility. This delivery and installation of family fun sets service has no comparable competitors in their service area and as an authorized dealer, this establishment handles the sales, delivery, and installation of activity sets made for the whole family.  They are able to control the quality and timeliness of every instillation through their well-trained and experienced team. The business’s staff consists of 3 in store sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, 2 installers, 2 seasonal installers, and 2 subcontractors. The purchase of this business comes with over $700,000 of assets including equipment, vehicles, and inventory. A 12.5% down payment of $311,250 returns $595,646 allowing potential buyers the opportunity for a 193% return on investment in the first year after debt payments! Furthering the business’s reasonable expectancy for success is their gross revenue which was nearly $4 million for the trailing twelve months period!

     

    This commercial and residential sports and play sets business is relatively recession resistant. Recent years have shown that regardless of the economic climate, parents will manage to find ways to make their children feel special. Not only does this hands-on sales space allow parents to “try before you buy” it also acts as a space for hosting birthday parties and an indoor destination that is sure to please any child looking for fun on a rainy or snowy day. One of this business’s most effective marketing tactics includes hosting on-site birthday parties and free-play time. Due to this tactic, a large portion of their customer base has approached them through word-of-mouth recommendations which has led to an excellent profit margin of 19% and an annualized cash flow of $899,777 for 2022.

     

    Priced at $2,475,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business, this opportunity is primed for new ownership to step in and build upon the growth pattern seen in recent years while benefiting from the day-to-day activities of bringing joy to children and their families that current ownership revels in. 

    PRICE $2,475,000 CASH FLOW $899,777

  • K-12 Architecture Practice: 25% Seller Carry

    This firm is currently working with clients in Arkansas, Oklahoma, Texas, Colorado, Florida, Connecticut, New Mexico, Kansas, Missouri, and the New England Area. Even with such a diverse client base, their client base is made up of 90% return customers!  With 2 locations and a full established staff of over 30 members, this business is able to handle work for 20-25 projects a time! The team consists of 31 employees including 2 SVP’s, 1 CFO, 11 architects, interior designers, and administrators. All employees are full-time, well-trained and experienced in their positions and their leadership team has been well mentored. This architecture firm has a main focus on buildings pertaining to the higher education and K-12 sector. Included in the purchase is over $2.6 million in assets, including equipment (computers, software, office equipment, leasehold improvements) and accounts receivables. This firm has nearly 20 years of experience under their belt, and have been able to accumulate an excellent reputation spurred on by happy customers which has led to 90% repeat clientele. The current owner is open to carrying 25% of the purchase to show good faith as well as the vested interest in the success of the business after sale. Both owners will stay on until retirement, providing both industry expertise and client relations.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, strong growth opportunities exist for this architectural firm, with only a small percentage of the regional school district market tapped and a lot of space for winning additional multifamily contracts. This firm’s extensive experience within the resident client base allows them to regularly win projects over larger national entities. This business also currently only has hospital clients making up roughly 10% of their customer base and with their current team, resources, and connections this would be an excellent opportunity for growth without expending unnecessary resources, and with their excellent rate of return customers, every new client is a resource that will return dividends over the years!

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,458,770

  • 30-year-old Chip Sealing Business with 15 on staff

     

    Based in South Dakota, this Chip Sealing business offers services including asphalt paving (5%), surface treatments and crack repair (5%), and chip sealing/ armor coating (90%). The current work in progress for this company exceeds $7.5M and included in the purchase of this business is over $4M in assets. Their fleet consists of work trucks ($479k), oil distributors ($796k), chip spreaders ($519k), dump trucks ($437k), tractors, trailers, rollers, and tanker trucks this business is primed for the work ahead. Having been established over 30 years ago, this asphalt and paving business has built an excellent staff and management system which will allow new ownership the opportunity for passive ownership. The team consists of 15 FT W2 Employees + 12 seasonal laborers, while the General Manager operates the company by providing support for billing, supply ordering, A/P and A/R, reporting, and contractual agreements. The employees waste no time and often complete smaller projects while in the area for contracted larger projects. These small projects can be completed in as little as one day, and they complete their largest projects within 10 days. Their client base is made up of primarily State, County, and Municipal Governments as well as Corp of Engineers and they also handle some residential work. Billing is also done in a timely manner, with invoices going out on the day of completion of the project. On smaller, private projects, the cost is collected before the project even begins!

     

    Many of their projects come from throughout South Dakota and Nebraska, filling up their schedule by April by winning bids in each area. With enough current equipment to support an additional team, the resources are ready to go to expand the business if desired! Priced at $5,625,000, a down payment of $843,750 would return $393,189 in the first year. The assets associated with this business collateralize over 75% of the purchase. This South Dakota asphalt paving business is ready for their next step and is an excellent opportunity for any new owner, as the current responsibilities of the owner consist of only project oversight!

    PRICE $5,625,000 CASH FLOW $1,617,882

  • Moving Company with Diversity in Corporate, Military, And Residential Packing, Hauling, or Storing

    This moving company has been serving Oregon and Washington for 2 decades expanding in over 10 strategic locations. Their services range from office/business moving, contracted military moves, some residential; they also offer packing/crating and warehousing in their storage sites. Consistently growing between 5-10% in revenue is attributed to their very strong organization chart of a P.T. resident CFO, leadership team and regional managers. This allows for passive ownership with the current owner only needing to be present for 2 meetings per month as all of his roles have been absorbed for the last several years. Conservatively projecting $31,000,000 in revenue this year, they will earn 14% profit margin from the clear processes and procedures their divisions have in place. These include call centers, sales, marketing and IT, and drivers.

     

    The business has recently started a mobile pod division, allowing them to provide further services to different types of clients and continue the overall growth.  Other opportunities include small, inexpensive acquisitions to expand the territory, also they are adding server farm moving and hauling. With their excellent reputation as well as their existing client base and locations they have a service area spanning across local, interstate, and international clients. At a purchase price of $26,000,000, there is an option for the seller to not only provide a 10% seller carry, but to also retain 15% in equity if desired. This is being done to show the vested interest in the ongoing success of the business post-close.  

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $4,340,000

  • White-Collar Staffing Firm with Focus on Accounting

    The seller of this white-collar staffing firm is on the hunt for a strategic buyer that can continue to grow the business. In order to make the deal more appealing to this strategic buyer, the seller is willing to carry 30% of the purchase! With services including staffing for CPAs, Accountants, and HR Professionals, the client base for this business is made up of accounting firms and private businesses looking to fill CPA, CFO, Bookkeeping, and HR positions. Their services are made up of 60% permanent placements and 40% temporary workers. While they are located in Kansas City, MO, this business’s client base – made up of 80% repeat customers – is dispersed nationwide! Their focused and driven team includes 17 Employees: 1 Controller/Office Manager, 1 VP, 11 Recruiters, 2 Account Managers, and 2 Administrative workers. The teams ongoing hard work, coupled with the business’s streamlined operation, has led to continued year over year growth in both revenue and cash flow. In 2021, this business had a gross revenue of $5.9MM and so far in 2022 has improved this revenue significantly having made $6.5MM through October alone! Showing support of the business’s upcoming continual growth is their current work-in-progress estimation of over 180 open jobs valued at over $2MM! This business has exponential room for even further growth after the purchase. With $1.2MM in assets included in purchase, this establishment comes with everything needed to maintain both the current operations and to expand into the various unutilized growth opportunities. Utilizing their long-standing reputation as a professional and industry leading staffing firm to expand into the engineering and architectural or legal recruiting fields would be a natural next step for a buyer.

     

    The current owner of this firm primarily handles the management and mentoring of the sales team. They are willing to stay on with the business for 5-7 years after sale and this is entirely negotiable depending on the needs of the buyer as the primary concern for this business is finding the right owner with a driven, growth focused skillset. Priced at $9,600,000, the current owner has offered to carry 30% of the purchase via a combined promissory note and equity roll to establish their vested interest in the ongoing success of the business after sale. Having been established over 35 years, a strategic owner could build on the existing client base and reputation in a wide variety of outlets. Are you a large staffing firm looking to expand into the professional market? Or perhaps looking to build up your client base, client retention rate, or customer relations? This could be your best opportunity!

    PRICE $9,600,000 CASH FLOW $2,346,249

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Maintenance in Commercial Roofing: Reoccurring

     

    Their client base is made up of 100% commercial clients including consultants, general contractors, private real estate owners, construction managers, and municipalities, 65% of whom are repeat clients. With 95 W2 Employees, this commercial roofing business is able to self-perform 100% of their labor. With $16M already lined up in backlog (committed contracts), they are on target to have the best year ever in 2023, and there is no sign of slowing down in 2023! Their services include reroofing/scheduled replacement (50%), new construction (40%), and general repair & maintenance (10%) and are able to service a wide service area including a 75-mile radius of Akron. The sale of this business includes $5M in assets, including 30+ trucks & trailers, and $2.6M in equipment. This means that new ownership would be able to easily build on current growth opportunities without needing to invest excessive resources to do so. Growth opportunities include going after more maintenance/service work, sheet metal projects, and the recently approved US Infrastructure Bill will also provide growth across the municipal clients they work with. The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-tomonth basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction. Priced at $14,950,000, this business is primed for new ownership with already long-standing client relationships in place, an excellent reputation, and a strong word of mouth job pipeline. The owners are looking forward to retiring out of state, but the two active owners are more than happy to stay on board post-close to ensure a smooth transition. Owner 1 handles the oversight and management, as well as review of estimates and would stay for 1 year, Owner 2 handles the day-to-day operations and would stay for 2 years, and Owner 3 (absentee) does not need replacing. They would be willing to retain equity or carry a note for 15%, showing their vested interest in the ongoing success on the company.

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $2,592,337

  • Passive Des Moines Home Renovation Company

     

    This passive Des Moines based home renovation company is stable and has huge growth potential! Boasting an amazing reputation which leads to repeat clients and referrals, this company has more than $1,600,000 in the pipeline for Q1 alone, which annualizes out to $6.4M in projected revenue! There is nearly $1M in assets including the company’s 14 vans, power tools, and inventory. This well-built operation is passive – with the owner dedicating only 5 to 7 hours a week to the business - but also boasts room to grow if an ambitious new owner wants to lean into growth opportunities. A well-executed hiring campaign to increase the volume of work, as well as possibly opening a satellite location, could drive this business even higher. 

     

    This experienced team provides a “one-stop-shop” approach to residential kitchen and bath remodels. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every installation by completing all work in house except for countertop instillation. Their complete showroom and an onsite designer provide 3D renderings for projects that allows for stress-free selections. Most projects happen in the kitchen (45%), the bathroom (45%), as well as other remodeling projects throughout the home. A 12% down payment of $677,829 returns $718,052 in the first year even after debt payments!

     

    An incredible asset of this business is the well-trained and experienced team who are cross-trained in many different skills and many of whom have a long tenure with the company. Leads manage the projects, and the general manager handles the day-to-day operations with the help of an office manager. The team works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. office building. The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and is willing to lease to the next owner. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has a long-standing relationship with customers; they are able to keep their service area within a 30-mile radius of the Des Moines metro.

    PRICE $5,648,580 CASH FLOW $1,569,050

  • Utility and Road Infrastructure – Municipal and School Focus protects from Recession

     

    Performing Excavation and Site Prep for Highways, School Districts and Municipalities; all client types that will protect this company from a looming recession, as the newly passed infrastructure bill will organically grow this Civil Contracting Firm through the public sector funded by tax payer dollars. Primarily serving Virginia, Kentucky, and West Virginia with their leadership team in Evansville, Indiana outside of the Corporate Headquarters. This firm has a diverse list of clients, including Municipalities 36%, Government 22%, Schools 23%, and Commercial 19%.  There is an impressive team in place of 120+, including 3 SVP’s, 8 superintendents, 1 office manager, 1 administrator/billing, and +/- 110 laborers.  With a backlog of over $33M, there is no shortage of coming work.  A buyer would be getting over $18M in assets with this purchase, including construction & transportation equipment, office equipment & software, and working capital of nearly $5M!  A 3rd party appraisal was completed in June of 2022 to verify the assets. 

     

    The current owner offers general oversight (by preference), which is not necessity as owner is 80+ years old.  He is willing to stay and transition for 1-2 years after closing.  The reason for selling at this time is to retire.  Something of note is that the owner could sell the equipment and cash out the A/R for more than the business price, but due to his loyalty and employees in place, he is choosing to sell the business as one cohesive unit so everyone keeps their jobs, and the business can continue to thrive as his legacy. 

     

    As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner is willing to carry 15% of the purchase price.  At a purchase price of $19,250,000, and assets valued at over $18M, the bank loan would be over-collateralized by the assets on hand and the return on investment makes this deal the top in our portfolio!


    PRICE $19,250,000 CASH FLOW $6,416,340

  • Clothing & Apparel Importing – 3 International Manufacturers

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million for 2022. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 12.5% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 12.5%, new owners can anticipate a 203% return on investment in the first year!

     

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

     

    With a price of $2,950,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $1,197,641

  • Web Based Marketing and Brand Development Service

    This primarily web based multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm is located in NYC and has clients dispersed nationwide. These clients primarily consist of financial services, national insurance agencies, technology, communications, and health care businesses. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. Their core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies and, thanks to their ability work with consultants and freelancers as needed, they are able to adapt to any market ebb and flow. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless and their 29% profit margin displays the payoff of having an experienced team and dedication to their field.

     

    Their core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $10,900,000, this company is primed for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $10,900,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Combined Listing – Firearm Sales & Services + Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue

     

    Something you don’t see every day – one owner selling two businesses!  For the price of $5.19M, you would be getting both a Firearm Sales & Services AND Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue!  By purchasing the two together, a buyer would be saving $200K Both businesses are located in the same strip center in Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, bringing in regular foot traffic and destination shoppers alike.

     

    At the firearms store, there are 5 FT employees and 1 PT.  The owner’s son is the managing member, and he is willing to stay on full time for the next owner.  That salary is accounted for in our cash flow.  The restaurant has 50 employees on staff, including a full management team for front of house and back of house.  The owner is willing to train and transition for 3-6 months at both businesses, as needed for the buyer.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still presently utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, filling roles and positions as needed during peak hours. With minimal online marketing, a significant growth opportunity exists for a new owner, with a current owner training period dependent on the experience and needs of the buyer.

     

    Customers of all types frequent the store – avid gun collectors, hunters, recreational shooters, people looking for a home protection firearm, local law enforcement agencies, first responders, and military personnel can find something to fit their needs. The revenue is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms vs. accessories. They also do firearm trade-ins, basic gunsmithing, scope installation, night sight installation, and total tear-down, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks. They sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers.

     

    This combined listing is a unique opportunity to get into two very different industries at the same time!

    PRICE $5,190,000 CASH FLOW $1,373,804

  • High-End Eatery – Passive Ownership. Financing Approved at 75%!

    This high-end eatery is selling on a low multiple of 2.1 and the financing for this purchase has already been approved with the bank loan making up 75% of purchase as shown in our listed funding example! This business offers the buyer an opportunity for passive ownership thanks to their excellent staff and management which consists of 30 servers, 18 kitchen staff, 1 General Manager; and 1 Kitchen Manager. This restaurant comes with over $1M in assets including an exclusive liquor license valued at $500K as Cumberland County has limited licenses – making this a closed market that won’t get oversaturated. Their posh place has 5,000 square feet and a capacity to host 100 customers indoors with additional covered booth seating available outside. With over $5M in revenue and cash flow over $808,000 in 2021, they are able to maintain a 3–4-week reservation wait list for Friday and Saturday nights. They have also been getting frequent requests to make Sunday brunch available, which would be an excellent growth opportunity. Their client base is drawn to the varied menu including elevated and delicious classics like Italian pasta, prime rib, salmon, fried calamari, seared scallops, and mussels.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March through April, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (which is still readily available and utilized) and were back to full capacity in 2021. The current owner provides general oversight, but this is a preference and could be easily phased out as they have two full time managers. With an established website but minimal online marketing, a significant and cost-efficient growth opportunity exists for new ownership.

     

    Priced at $2,650,000, the restaurant is primed to continue its current growth pattern far beyond 2021 with gross sales in 2022 annualizing over $5.4M! The current owner has offered to finance 12.5% of the purchase to show her faith in the business’s continued success after the purchase.

    PRICE $2,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,276,251

  • Online E-Commerce with 4,000 orders monthly

     

     

    This business is a Dropship E-Commerce Company with a 75% Repeat Clientele. This repeat client base focuses on materials that are used in medical offices, restaurants, offices and sanitation products. Providing over 400,000+ items, this business is able to drop ship anything pertaining to the industrial, janitorial, office, & restaurant markets as well as furniture and technology accessories. This E-Commerce business is currently fulfilling over 4,000 orders each month. This business has over 20 vendors, adding 2-3 new vendors each year. In addition to their success, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. This company is totally relocatable, with a small storage lease in Atlanta where return orders are processed. The owner currently lives in Tampa but has relocated to 3 different states over the course of the last 10 years proving that this business is truly relocatable. Their software, Channel Advisor, can manage up to 1 million SKUs allowing the new ownership significant room for growth. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and with the extremely efficient team of 7 cross-trained employees, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States.

    This company is priced at $4,850,000 and is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. Current ownership is confident in the continual success of this business and has offered a much larger than normal Promissory note and/or equity roll of 25% on this business and a training/transition period of one year or more if needed. The current owner is looking to sell this business due to health concerns as he Is preparing to undergo a back surgery.


    PRICE $4,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,238,004

  • Earthwork, Shoreline Protection, Site Prep in Texas – 90+ FT Employees

    This Earthwork & Industrial Site Prep business completes 225 jobs per year, with a minimum of 20 active projects at one time!  Located in Victoria, Texas and with 90+ FT employees, their average client tenure is 13 years. Sale size ranges from $10k to $1.5M, with an average of $350k. With $9.4M in WIP and over $3M in their pipeline, work is plentiful for this well-diversified team. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 30% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 70% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own 90+ person team completing the work, which boosts profit margin.

     

    Over $7M in assets includes $5M in heavy equipment, $1.2M in vehicles, $57k worth of trailers, tools valued at $365k, and office furniture & software worth $379k. The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month; this rate would be kept the same under new ownership. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years where they have a 75% win rate; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 25% success rate on those. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area to other gulf states for high margin erosion control projects and actively pursuing more bids would certainly lead to an increase in revenue. There is currently a very limited sales team and little to no marketing. Working Capital is $2.1M and would transfer to the new owner.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,154,501

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Commercial AC & Refrigeration Repair & Installation Service

    Established in 1997, this HVAC company located on Maui is known as the #1 refrigeration and air-conditioning company. Well known in the area for their excellent and prompt service and customer care, their excellent team consists of 16 employees, including trusted technicians, office staff, and installation managers. Due to the excellent reputation and efficient team, the owner of this successful HVAC company enjoys 3-4 months out of state each year! The business’s services are equally split between equipment service and installation. Their client base is made up of 90% commercial clients including condos, shopping centers, restaurants, and office buildings. They also service premium private residents. While the business had a small dip in revenue in 2020 due to covid, with a gross revenue of $4.8M in 2021 this business has already beat their pre-pandemic numbers and 2022 has continued to show growth and is expected to have a revenue of $5.2M.

     

    Having been in business for over 20 years, the owner has been able to train personnel to manage the business in his absence for 3-4 months per year and his current responsibilities consist of financial oversite and general management. To show vested interest in the business and assist with a smooth transition of ownership, the owner has offered a 1-year training period. Operations are managed from a large 6,000 square feet location in the Kahului area. The office has 2,000 square feet of space and the remaining 4,000 square feet is dedicated to their warehouse and sheet metal shop.

     

    Priced at $2,850,000, there is tremendous growth potential for a new owner. The company does almost no marketing; their only advertisement efforts being from their website and ads on their trucks. Over the years, all of their business has come from word of mouth due to the excellent service provided. A 12.5% down payment of $356,250 returns $410,069 in the first year after debt payments – a 115% return on investment! The current owner has also offered a 12.5% equity roll or financing to demonstrate his faith and continued investment in the success of the business. 

    PRICE $2,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,357,546

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Multi Location Urgent Care with niche focus in Physicals

    Buyer does not need to be a doctor; the owner is passive and lives over 2 hours away! Their team of 19 includes 1 Business Development Manager, 3 Providers (Nurse Practitioners), 3 Billing Reps, 10 Medical Assistants, and 2 X-Ray Techs. For over 15 years, this multi-location practice has been providing care for workers compensation accidents, treating on the job injuries, DOT physicals, drug testing, and pre-placement screening in Elkhart, Indiana. The business development manager has brought on 90 new clients since 2020! Their repeat client base is businesses and employers in the area. The current owner only works 10 hours/week via phone and he is still willing to stay on board to train and transition for 2 years after closing to ensure a smooth transaction. There is little to no competition in the area, outside of expensive hospitals. This practice does not have any hospital affiliations.

    A 3rd location is fully equipped and ready to open as soon as the staff is all trained. With the purchase, a buyer would be getting in receipt of 2 vehicles, medical equipment, office furnishings, and A/R. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner will carry or hold an equity roll of 12.5%. Boasting a profit margin of 50%, year over year growth, and over $1.5M in cash flow, the numbers speak for themselves! Priced at $7,050,000, this business is a passive opportunity with exponential growth opportunities requiring minimal additional resources to be expended.

    PRICE $7,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,680,388

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Toronto Multi-Service Engineering Firm – 31% Profit Margin

    With over $4.6M in sales and a 31% profit margin in 2020, this Toronto-based engineering consulting firm has seen steady growth over the years. With solid long-term relationships established with their clients throughout Canada, they offer a variety of services including geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, noise & vibration monitoring, geotechnical engineering & material testing, building design, environmental engineering, civil engineering design & planning, hydrogeological engineering, Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) scanning services, noise impact studying, and construction dust monitoring.  Taking on large, long-term projects for transit authorities, governmental organizations, and general contractors, this company has wide-ranging capabilities creating a consolidated resource for customers to meet their project goals. A focus of the company is on transit systems including tunneling, subway, rail and subway stations, bridges, sewer and water infrastructure, and highways. Their 50 personnel includes professional engineers, architects, subject matter experts, software engineers, surveyors, accounting, and administration.

    The owner of this business currently oversees operations and is a reliable and very knowledgeable resource for employees. The owner manages the strong growth trajectory and supports positive client relationships.  To continue revenue growth, one could consider offering commissions to the sales team to boost external relationships networking and earning additional contracts.  

    Operations are managed from the 10,000 square foot headquarters located in the Greater Toronto Area. The company has over 15 years of experience serving Canada, and has expanded its business to Trinidad, Tobago, Turkey, China, and the United States.

    PRICE $8,400,000 CASH FLOW $1,420,321

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • International PR and Event Firm with Passive Ownership

     

    This international company has been around since 1995, and in that time has been able to establish a diversified clientele base made up of only 30% local and regional clients and 70% international clients! This has been possible thanks to their 64 experienced staff members including 5 management board members and 33FT and 26PT workers operating in graphic design, client relations, media analysis, web services, social media, administration, editing, and outreach. With this excellent chain of command, the owner has been able to transition to a completely passive ownership with no billable hours. This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency currently has a profit margin of 29%. The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management. 

     

    The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well. Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of 64. This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease. 

     

    At a purchase price of $1,500,000 and a down payment of $300,000, a buyer would see a return of $308,766 in the first year after debt payments! This business is established and ready for a new owner to step in!

    PRICE $1,500,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

  • Commercial Roofing with 16 Million in Backlog

     

     

    After 30 years in business, this 100% commercial roofing company has over 16 million in backlog and does 70% maintenance work! Their team includes 25 administrative staff members and a combined 60 metal workers and craftsman. The business will use subcontractors on a rare and minimal scale for specialty work. Their client base spans over a 120-mile radius of Erie, PA and consists of exclusively commercial clients, which, coupled with their excellent reputation, has led to their customer pool being made up of 60% recurring clients. Having been open for over 30 years, this business and team have been able to acquire an excellent reputation with their clients and have established profitable partnerships in their community and surrounding areas which keeps word of mouth marketing effective all year round. Though the owner is active in oversight and management, he is willing to stay on for 2 years post-close to not only train & transition, but to help find and train his replacement if the buyer desires. With over $6 million of assets included in the purchase, new ownership can expect to continue this business’s ongoing growth pattern without investing excessive resources into expanding opportunities. They fully self-perform all labor and have an extensive staff and established chain of command.

     

    This area is well known for their requirements of union-based employees and businesses for construction or repair work. Thankfully, this business is well intertwined with local unions, and 75% of their current projects come from those established partnerships. While they do some public work with these ties, expanding their partnerships and open bids to include more municipal work would be a huge opportunity for growth. Other opportunities would include expanding into residential work or growing the new installation side of business as their current primary focus is maintenance and repair.

     

    Priced at $14,950,000 a 10% down payment of $1,495,000 returns $1,619,957 in the first year after debt payments. The current owner is selling as part of his retirement strategy. 

     

    PRICE $14,950,000 CASH FLOW $3,615,422

Logistics/Distribution/Procurement (10)

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Staffing Support for Military & Federal Agencies – Diversified Positions

     

    This business provides staffing & labor for military branches and federal agencies such as the Navy, Air force, DOT, DOL, and DOD. They recruit and place personnel in very diversified positions including administration (receptionists, data entry, IT support, training leads, and program managers to name a few). Their highly trained staff is made up of 1 Controller, 1 In House Counsel serving as HR and Foreign Security Officer, 1 Business Development Representative, and 3 Admin, along with roughly 70 billable contract staff. Of the services provided, administrative support makes up 50% of their services, program management is 15%, Logistics makes up 30%, and IT is 5%. This business operation is very similar to a staffing agency.

     

    While there are two owners currently, one is basically just oversight and would not need a replacement moving forward, and the other is willing to stay on board for 3-4 years post-close to ensure a smooth and successful transition and ongoing growth.  Overall growth opportunities include expanding on the current potential for IT contracts, a great opportunity for a tech business to expand their services and expand their client base into the government sector. The working capital of nearly $400,000 will be given to the buyer and, with the low equipment needed, capital expenditure is nil.

     

    Priced at $2,795,000, this business is perfectly positioned for a buyer to step in and continue the already consistent year over year growth trends.  As a show of good faith, the current owners are willing to carry 20% of the financing. This is to help prove their vested interest in the ongoing success of the company.

     

    PRICE $2,795,000 CASH FLOW $627,203

  • Apparel Distributor with Manufacturing in Mexico

    Conservatively projecting to hit $17M in annual revenue, this company is primed for a buyer who can continue this growth pattern.  They pride themselves on what they call “Elevated Everyday Apparel,” which they design, oversee manufacturing, and then distribute to their clients.  The clients are highly reputable and recognizable, including Nordstroms, Burlington, PacSun, and as of last quarter, they are now rolling out Target!  The company has manufacturers in Mexico, Guatemala, and China and distribution throughout North America.  They have 10 of their own brands, over 50 licenses, and also do white label for retailers.  The team is well developed with 4 in management/office administration, 7 in art and design, 3 in sales, and 4 in production.

     

    The two owners spend about 25 hours each in the business per week, with Owner 1 overseeing the production and sales team, and Owner 2 working with the art department and merchandising.  One person could easily do both roles.  This replacement salary is accounted for in the cash flow.  As a show of good faith, they are willing to do a combination of promissory note and equity roll for 15%.  With a purchase price of $3,640,000 and a down payment of $364,000, you would see a return of $487,662 after debt payment, a 134% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,640,000 CASH FLOW $1,040,324

  • B2B Wholesale & Logistics with Owner to Carry 30%

     

     

    This wholesale & distribution business has Sellers open to remaining on board for 4 years and are willing to do a 30% carry or equity roll combo for a sign of a vested interest in the business’s success. With boosting sales of $29MM in 2021 the business is servicing clients in the B2B space. They have two primary client types of Small Wholesalers & direct Shop Owners. The business does not sell any traditional cannabis products but rather regulated hemp which allows them to totally legally sell across state lines. The business is operating out of a 12,000 sq. ft. distribution facility in Orange County and has a strong team of about 40 individuals who are experts in this industry. This includes a CFO, General Manager, VP of Sales, Retail Lead, 2 Manufacturing Leads, Warehouse Lead, 4 Warehouse Associates, 5 In House Sales Reps, 24 Packagers, and 19 Outside Sales Reps. They do not have any drivers, as this is all outsourced. They have unparalleled growth from 11 million to nearly 30 million over the last 24 months! This company focuses mainly on Distribution and Logistics to other much smaller wholesalers which makes up 59% of their revenue, while 38% is sold Business to Business directly to shop owners; less than 3% is sold direct to the consumer and this is intentional for research and development purposes.

    Their services include wholesale, coordinating manufacturing, packaging & fulfillment, and arranging logistics, though that is outsourced to 3rd party freight companies. The current owners recently reinvested significant amounts of time and money into expanding operations, including moving toa distribution center twice the size to handle the growth, and they brought on Delta8, along with other unique products to continue being the industry leader. A buyer will be able to enjoy the spoils of this recent focus, but they will also have multiple opportunities to continue this growth trajectory. Note from the seller: “In response to any concerns regarding Vapes. Inhale-able products have gone from roughly 80% of sales last year to closer to 30% as we pivoted towards the edible products in 2022. This limits exposure to possible Inhale-able product legislation.” Currently there are 35 States who have recognized these Low-Dose consumables as a legal product and there are projected to be another 6-9 states that will follow suit in the next 6-9 months. Priced at $42,000,000, the seller is offering a combination of Promissory Note and Equity Roll for a total of 30% if desired by the buyer. This is a sign of good faith in the business continuing successfully. The 4.1 multiple on a business boasting a 2-year average $8,559,125 in cash flow, a 36% profit margin is a very fair ask, as they are looking for a strategic buyer for growth.

    This fulfilment, wholesale, and distribution business has 4 subsidiaries, each with a unique product and target consumer. The products range from legalized low dose CBD to natural consumables. This market provides an alternative to western medicine and has helped users manage their pain without the fear of an addiction. The use of these products/alternative is on the rise and has helped people with Alzheimer’s Disease, Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS), Crohn’s Disease, Epilepsy and Seizures, Glaucoma, Multiple Sclerosis and Muscle Spasms, Severe and Chronic Pain, Severe Nausea or Vomiting caused by Cancer Treatment. There are several health benefits, as it is better for you than alcohol, helps to calm anxiety, and assists with PTSD. Individual states are continually expanding the legality of hemp and nicotine-based products, which allows for organic growth. The owner also sits on a major lobbying board that campaigns Congress constantly. As the health benefits of hemp and cannabis products continue to be shared, the client base for this business continues to grow. The goal for selling at this time is to expand with a Strategic Buyer or Equity Group who can bring strong business acumen and who may want to grow into manufacturing, bringing it in house to enhance profit margins.

     

    PRICE $42,000,000 CASH FLOW $10,356,976

  • Niche Rental Fleet of Directional Drills – Growth with Infrastructure Bill

    With a location in Phoenix, Arizona and in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to rent to Prime Contractors, foundation companies, and infrastructure GC’s throughout the Southwest. Over $4M in backlog and $3.6M in their sales pipeline, this Industrial drilling equipment business is on track to have an amazing 2023. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright. Established over 15 years ago, this wellknown business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. With nearly $8 Million in assets the buyers’ loan is 100% Collateralized! With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The team consists of industry experts including the COO/Sales manager, a Project and Operations Manager, Accounting and Sales Representative, Office Administrator, a Lead Mechanic plus his Technician, a Yard Manager and Technician Consultant. The current owner only spends 15 hours a week in the business with the role of general oversite and is offering up to a 2-year transition period.

    Priced at $9,975,000 this business is ready for new ownership to step in and enjoy continued growth. The current owner believes in the business’s onward & upward revenues and, as a show of this faith and to mitigate the risk for future ownership, the seller has offered to carry a 20% Seller note and/or Equity Roll. Opportunities for growth include expanding into the Mining Sector, Electrical Sector, International Market, Casing Manufacturing and Distributorships for other product lines. They could easily add 3-5 new product lines in a short amount of time. The newly signed Infrastructure bill will allow organic growth making this opportunity recession-proof.

    PRICE $9,975,000 CASH FLOW $2,075,675

  • Clothing & Apparel Importing – 3 International Manufacturers

    This private label clothing design and distribution company designs lifestyle apparel and imports and manufactures the apparel under private labels. With over 20 years of experience in the industry and three individual brands under their parent umbrella, this company has seen significant growth with an annualized revenue of over $10 million for 2022. This business works with three international factories in China, India, and Pakistan and serves a wide variety of retail clients in the United States, Canada, and Europe. Specializing in creating lifestyle men’s wear including t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, this could be an excellent investment and consolidation opportunity for current clothing distributors struggling to break into men’s wear. Their skilled team includes 7 industry leading employees specializing in different necessary areas including design, marketing, sales, merchandising, and logistics. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person. The purchase of this business also includes nearly $500,000 in business equity based on the fair market value. There are also ample growth opportunities for new ownership to move into the women’s and children’s clothing fields utilizing their existing client relationships and thriving reputation for high quality and uniquely styled clothing. This business has nearly $800,000 of business equity included in the asking price based on the fair market value and the current owner has agreed to stay with the company for 1 to 2 years in order to ensure a smooth transition. On top of this, not only are the current owners offering to finance 12.5% of the purchase, but with the asking down payment of 12.5%, new owners can anticipate a 203% return on investment in the first year!

     

    While this company’s sales are primarily to private label business, they also have a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They also collaborate with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for their brand. There is currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and stay ahead of the market.

     

    With a price of $2,950,000, this business not only offers exponential financial assets included in the asking price, it also shows great promise moving forward as it continues to preserve essential clients and is looking for new ownership.

    PRICE $2,950,000 CASH FLOW $1,197,641

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Online E-Commerce with 4,000 orders monthly

     

     

    This business is a Dropship E-Commerce Company with a 75% Repeat Clientele. This repeat client base focuses on materials that are used in medical offices, restaurants, offices and sanitation products. Providing over 400,000+ items, this business is able to drop ship anything pertaining to the industrial, janitorial, office, & restaurant markets as well as furniture and technology accessories. This E-Commerce business is currently fulfilling over 4,000 orders each month. This business has over 20 vendors, adding 2-3 new vendors each year. In addition to their success, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. This company is totally relocatable, with a small storage lease in Atlanta where return orders are processed. The owner currently lives in Tampa but has relocated to 3 different states over the course of the last 10 years proving that this business is truly relocatable. Their software, Channel Advisor, can manage up to 1 million SKUs allowing the new ownership significant room for growth. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and with the extremely efficient team of 7 cross-trained employees, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States.

    This company is priced at $4,850,000 and is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. Current ownership is confident in the continual success of this business and has offered a much larger than normal Promissory note and/or equity roll of 25% on this business and a training/transition period of one year or more if needed. The current owner is looking to sell this business due to health concerns as he Is preparing to undergo a back surgery.


    PRICE $4,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,238,004

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

Hospitality/Events/Restaurants (11)

  • High-End Eatery – Passive Ownership. Financing Approved at 75%!

    This high-end eatery is selling on a low multiple of 2.1 and the financing for this purchase has already been approved with the bank loan making up 75% of purchase as shown in our listed funding example! This business offers the buyer an opportunity for passive ownership thanks to their excellent staff and management which consists of 30 servers, 18 kitchen staff, 1 General Manager; and 1 Kitchen Manager. This restaurant comes with over $1M in assets including an exclusive liquor license valued at $500K as Cumberland County has limited licenses – making this a closed market that won’t get oversaturated. Their posh place has 5,000 square feet and a capacity to host 100 customers indoors with additional covered booth seating available outside. With over $5M in revenue and cash flow over $808,000 in 2021, they are able to maintain a 3–4-week reservation wait list for Friday and Saturday nights. They have also been getting frequent requests to make Sunday brunch available, which would be an excellent growth opportunity. Their client base is drawn to the varied menu including elevated and delicious classics like Italian pasta, prime rib, salmon, fried calamari, seared scallops, and mussels.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March through April, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (which is still readily available and utilized) and were back to full capacity in 2021. The current owner provides general oversight, but this is a preference and could be easily phased out as they have two full time managers. With an established website but minimal online marketing, a significant and cost-efficient growth opportunity exists for new ownership.

     

    Priced at $2,650,000, the restaurant is primed to continue its current growth pattern far beyond 2021 with gross sales in 2022 annualizing over $5.4M! The current owner has offered to finance 12.5% of the purchase to show her faith in the business’s continued success after the purchase.

    PRICE $2,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,276,251

  • Tennessee Based Meal Prep and Catering Service

    This business comes with a diverse menu, established client pipeline and staff, and continual year over year growth in gross revenue. Based in Tennessee, this meal prep and catering service offers preassembled healthy, delicious, and allergy aware meals to be delivered. With an excellent website to order off of, clients can place an order any day of the week before Friday at noon to be delivered the following Sunday or Monday. Orders can be for individuals, families, and catering from events to an office lunch. Current staff includes 25 total workers consisting of a combination of prep cooks, line cooks, managers, and delivery drivers. They outsource roughly 90% of deliveries in addition to their on-staff drivers. With a menu consisting of niche availabilities including gluten free, dairy free, keto, and whole360 options, it’s no wonder that their service area stretches to reach a 50-mile radius around Nashville. A rotating menu consisting of fan favorites including chicken, steak, vegetarian, pasta, and burrito meals keeps both individual and catering customers coming back for more!

     

    Unlike most food, service, or catering businesses, this business not only survived but thrived during the Covid19 pandemic. Thanks to their preestablished reputation and ability to deliver prepackaged, healthy, and delicious meals, their service boomed in covid. Changing from buffet style catering and continuing to offer home delivered meals, both sides of this business continually grew both in 2020 and 2021. Thanks to returning customers and referrals, we have reason to believe that 2022 will see continued growth based on the first quarter income. Only one of the current owners is active in the day to day of the business as there are currently 4 managers in place and they have offered 2 months of training to ensure a smooth transition. Growth opportunities for new ownership include a shift in catering focus to include more event-based work rather than just office orders, increasing available delivery days, and expanding on current high-profile clientele into brand partnerships.

     

    Priced at $1,600,000 this business is ready for a new owner to step in and capitalize on existing assets!

    PRICE $1,600,000 CASH FLOW $411,334

  • 3 Location Restaurant in New York

    Established in 1991, this family restaurant is located near two colleges and has expanded into 3 locations serving the Plattsburgh community and surrounding areas. Serving Hotdogs to Hamburgers, Chicken to seafood, this restaurant prides itself with their fan favorite menu. Each location has an outside patio and provides curb-side pickup which worked well in their favor during 2020 allowing guests to eat outside while many other restaurants closed their doors to the public. This business has 20 on staff with 2 tenured cooks who have been with the company for 20+ years, 3 full-time front of house associates, and 15 part time employees. After 35 years of business, the current owners are looking to sell in order to plan for their retirement. Included in the purchase of this business is $650,000 in assets which include the furniture, kitchen equipment and travel trailers for catering events.

     

    The current owners provide general oversight to the two locations and handle payroll and scheduling. In addition to their accounting duties, the owners are responsible for making their well-known sauce that is used on most menu items. Unfortunately, one of the three locations in non-operational due to a death in the family in 2020 but this location remains fully equipped for operations to continue but will need more on staff to run smoothly. The current owners have agreed to stay on for 6 months to a year in order to provide a smooth transition as well as carry 15% equity to show good faith in the continued success of this business.

     

    Priced at $1,425,000, this business is primed for new ownership with many opportunities for growth. A new owner has the opportunity to add a card reader as another form of payment (as they currently only accept cash), expand into internet sales, and provide a delivery service. Additionally, the homemade sauce has been requested by many; jarring this key component and selling it separately could be an opportunity to generate more revenue.

    PRICE $1,425,000 CASH FLOW $390,403

  • Sports & Playsets for Schools and Residential Outdoor Use

    Established in 1993, this extremely high-quality recreational equipment business is incredibly well known in the Omaha area. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet facility. This delivery and installation of family fun sets service has no comparable competitors in their service area and as an authorized dealer, this establishment handles the sales, delivery, and installation of activity sets made for the whole family.  They are able to control the quality and timeliness of every instillation through their well-trained and experienced team. The business’s staff consists of 3 in store sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, 2 installers, 2 seasonal installers, and 2 subcontractors. The purchase of this business comes with over $700,000 of assets including equipment, vehicles, and inventory. A 12.5% down payment of $311,250 returns $595,646 allowing potential buyers the opportunity for a 193% return on investment in the first year after debt payments! Furthering the business’s reasonable expectancy for success is their gross revenue which was nearly $4 million for the trailing twelve months period!

     

    This commercial and residential sports and play sets business is relatively recession resistant. Recent years have shown that regardless of the economic climate, parents will manage to find ways to make their children feel special. Not only does this hands-on sales space allow parents to “try before you buy” it also acts as a space for hosting birthday parties and an indoor destination that is sure to please any child looking for fun on a rainy or snowy day. One of this business’s most effective marketing tactics includes hosting on-site birthday parties and free-play time. Due to this tactic, a large portion of their customer base has approached them through word-of-mouth recommendations which has led to an excellent profit margin of 19% and an annualized cash flow of $899,777 for 2022.

     

    Priced at $2,475,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business, this opportunity is primed for new ownership to step in and build upon the growth pattern seen in recent years while benefiting from the day-to-day activities of bringing joy to children and their families that current ownership revels in. 

    PRICE $2,475,000 CASH FLOW $899,777

  • Absentee, Multi-Location Entertainment Business

     

    This absentee, multi-location entertainment business saw a profit margin of 40% in 2021!  With a regional manager to oversee day to day operations, and managers in place at each location, a new owner would be able to run this as a hands-off investment if desired!  The regional is aware of the sale and is willing to stay on board under new ownership to continue running the business.  On top of 1-2 managers on site, there are also 3-5 part time Game Masters per location who run the experience for customers and assist throughout the event.

     

    The locations are spread across the Midwest, with one in Omaha, Nebraska, Lincoln, Nebraska, Springfield, Missouri, and Grand Rapids, Michigan.  Omaha was started in 2014, Lincoln & Springfield in 2015, followed by Grand Rapids in 2017, so each area is well-established, and the brand continues to make a name for itself regionally.  Each space is leased (details in the confidential package) and would be available for a new owner to continue renting onward going.

     

    There are multiple options for the escape rooms at each location, from stopping a pandemic to solving a murder mystery.  This allows customers to come back time and time again for a new experience!  They have garnered a great customer base.  Between the 4 locations, they boast a following of over 30,000 email subscribers.

     

    Priced at $1,525,000, a 15% down payment of $228,750 returns $239,362 in the first year after debt payments. This is not an opportunity to miss and is one that is guaranteed to have consistent and excellent services.

    PRICE $1,525,000 CASH FLOW $458,879

  • Combined Listing – Firearm Sales & Services + Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue

     

    Something you don’t see every day – one owner selling two businesses!  For the price of $5.19M, you would be getting both a Firearm Sales & Services AND Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue!  By purchasing the two together, a buyer would be saving $200K Both businesses are located in the same strip center in Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, bringing in regular foot traffic and destination shoppers alike.

     

    At the firearms store, there are 5 FT employees and 1 PT.  The owner’s son is the managing member, and he is willing to stay on full time for the next owner.  That salary is accounted for in our cash flow.  The restaurant has 50 employees on staff, including a full management team for front of house and back of house.  The owner is willing to train and transition for 3-6 months at both businesses, as needed for the buyer.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still presently utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, filling roles and positions as needed during peak hours. With minimal online marketing, a significant growth opportunity exists for a new owner, with a current owner training period dependent on the experience and needs of the buyer.

     

    Customers of all types frequent the store – avid gun collectors, hunters, recreational shooters, people looking for a home protection firearm, local law enforcement agencies, first responders, and military personnel can find something to fit their needs. The revenue is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms vs. accessories. They also do firearm trade-ins, basic gunsmithing, scope installation, night sight installation, and total tear-down, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks. They sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers.

     

    This combined listing is a unique opportunity to get into two very different industries at the same time!

    PRICE $5,190,000 CASH FLOW $1,373,804

  • 100% Delivery & Take Out – Omaha Pizza Franchise Location

     

    This Omaha pizza franchise location is currently 100% delivery & take out and is still seeing an increase in revenue through COVID! This location for sale has been in business since 1980, and under current ownership since 2006. There are around 21 employees, with FT Shift Leaders, and PT Kitchen Staff, Front Counter, and Delivery Drivers. All employees start at $11/hr., with Shift Leader pay at $18-18.50/hr. 80% of all employees are trained to full completion through the corporate online training. As the restaurant is franchised, a 5% portion of the revenue is paid out to the corporation, in addition to a small fee of $61/month for a customer loyalty program, in which a customer can earn free items as they accumulate points through the restaurant’s app. Their POS, Speedline, is fully integrated through Tillster, so the push of one button sets delivery in motion. Approximately 77% of the revenue is from dinner orders (after 4:00).

     

    Post-COVID, the restaurant has transitioned to be fully delivery and take-out based, with sales vastly improving over 2019. Currently, the dining area is still closed, and thus would be a perfect growth opportunity for a new owner, as the present dining area furniture was reupholstered during the COVID shutdown. Other key assets include two Middleby Marshall ovens, a make table, 60 qt. Hobart mixer, cooler, a Somerset dough sheeter, and POS systems. A great deal of local marketing is already done, with an advertising co-op being headed by local owners, and advertising partnerships done with local schools. The current owner provides general management and oversight for the location, opening the restaurant on Mondays and overall working 25-30 hours per week.

     

    Priced at just $535,000, a 15% down payment of $80,250 returns $88,861 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!  A new owner could certainly boost revenue by obtaining a liquor license and re-opening the dining room.

    PRICE $535,000 CASH FLOW $156,707

  • West Omaha Local Pub with over $300K in Profit

     

    This 100% absentee owned business is offering anyone the opportunity to step into a new entrepreneurial venture as it is currently priced to sell with a very low multiple of 3.05 due to the owner’s need to relocate closer to family! Having been established since 2012, this local bar and grill has been a fan favorite for its diverse repeat client whose out-spoken voices have helped tailor the menu to the local favorites. Not only is it priced for accessibility, the business has an excellent staff and chain of command established, a well-renowned local reputation, and a well-traveled and safe space in the community that is large enough to cater to each of its loyal patrons! The 22 person staff consists of 3 full-time managers with the remaining 19 part-time associates controlling the day-to-day restaurant operations. Currently this business opens their doors to the public at 3PM allowing the happy hour crowd a place to unwind but the owner has noted that there is an opportunity for growth if the new owner extends these hours earlier in the day to allow for a lunch rush.

     

    Priced at $955,000, a 10% down payment of $95,500 returns $185,239 in the first year after debt payments! This lowered price offers new ownership the opportunity for a 193% return on investment in the first year! Excellent and expansive marketing in recent years has led to great success as most weekends are standing room only in their space of over 3,800 sq. ft. Fear not, this business comes with over $130,000 in assets so that the buyer can continue to handle this high volume of customers. This business has an excellent local reputation and is well known in the area as the place to go for specific pallet cravings. 

     

    PRICE $955,000 CASH FLOW $310,514

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

  • 105-Person Capacity Bar with Kitchen

    In business for 14 years, this business has $180,000 in buildout with a capacity of 105 people! They added a cozy fenced in patio with wind protection for smokers. Equipment totals $60,000 and includes a walk-in freezer/fridge, a kitchen hood, dishwasher, and miscellaneous furniture, fixtures, and equipment. There are two full time bartenders/ servers and five part-time servers/bartenders that take care of the customers. The lease is $4,635 per month for 2,500 square feet and a new owner would only have to put forth a down payment of $40,000.

    Selling the business as a part of a planned retirement strategy, the current owner is responsible for cleaning, inventory management, vendor relations, bookkeeping, bank deposits and payroll. There are growth opportunities in advertising on social media, establishing B2B relationships with nearby businesses and other forms of low cost or free advertising.

    With continual development in the area, this bar and grill is in the prime location for success! When it comes to the developing areas in Omaha, this is one to watch.  The neighboring $200MM project will bring apartment complexes, 300,000 sq. ft. of office space and neighborhood retail and an amphitheater near this retail hot spot. Sporting a unique theme that lures in a mix of consistent locals and fresh out of town visitors, the bar hosts competitive dart leagues throughout the week, Keno and karaoke on the weekends to keep the place busy.


    PRICE $115,000

  • Award-Wiinning Eatery near Omaha

    This eatery very close to Omaha does not only have great-tasting food, but also happens to be in a location full of growth potential!! A new big-box department store has just been approved nearby along with a new street sign, leading to more traffic and MORE customers! This eatery has won “Best Of” in their current location. It has also already grown 24.1% since last year 

    PRICE $137,000 CASH FLOW $90,403

Selfcare/Childcare (11)

  • Non-Medical Home Health & Recession Resistant

     

     

    This home health business handles the non-medical care of clients across 5 different counties! This agency has more than 50 caregivers employed and a top leadership team of 3 managers that allow the seller to work a minimal 15 hours per week. Not only are the clients for this business diversified, they will need the care offered by this establishment regardless of the current economic status, meaning this business is essentially recession resistant. The client type for this in-home care company consists of people who require more assistance within their day-day activities. Seniors, respite patients, those with dementia, and veterans are their main focus. This companion care business recently received a contract with the VA in 2021, expanding their already diverse client base. Located in Omaha, NE, their service area currently includes the Omaha Metropolitan Area and surrounding cities, reaching as far as Fremont, Ralston, Bellevue, and Council Bluffs. Primarily these caregivers are in the homes of their clients, allowing this business to operate out of a 2,800 sq. ft. office space which in return keeps the overhead cost low. The current owner is selling due to deterring health unfortunately.

    Priced at $849,000, the current owner has offered 10% financing as a show of good faith in the continued success of the business after sale. This investment has exponential growth including further development the Fremont and Council Bluffs client bases, developing the newly awarded VA contract, and creating partnerships with workman’s compensation divisions. While each of these opportunities could provide significant growth with minimal additional investment, a buyer could also have the chance to enjoy their 18% profit margin if they wanted to be passive and not do anything to improve!

     

    PRICE $849,000 CASH FLOW $239,207

  • Endodontics Practice: Seller will Stay up to 3 Years

    The current owner of this endodontics practice has a desire to step away from the business aspects of the practice in order to exclusively focus on his passion of patient care.  He has not only offered to stay on as the primary endodontist for 2-3 years after the purchase, he also offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show good faith in the direction and success of the business. Having been established over 50 years ago, this business is able to boast not only an excellent staff but also a stable and growing revenue thanks to their excellent and continual client pipeline and marketing strategies. With a staff consisting of 3 assistants, 2 front office staff members, and 2.5 DDS working in 4 fully furnished operatories, they are built to serve the entire Philadelphia area. This Endodontics practice is fully equipped to handle both surgical and non-surgical procedures and thanks to the variety of offered procedures they have developed an extremely diverse patient demographic. The business handles both pre- and post-procedure root canal work on all ages of clients and is equipped with the tools to cast same day fittings for the patient, which in return, provides the customer with a smile that they once lost due to aches and pains.

     

    Priced at $890,000, all prospective buyers regardless of background are welcome to inquire as the current owner is willing to do what is needed to ensure a smooth transaction. Included in the purchase of this business is $136,000 worth of equipment including the previously mentioned operatories along with microscopes and CPCT 3-D imaging machines. This practice has a great deal of growth opportunities, including an expansion of operations out into the Philadelphia suburbs as well as an increase of online presence and an increase in marketing in general. Just a 10% down payment of $89,000 returns $114,233 in the first year after debt payments—a 128% return on investment!

    PRICE $890,000 CASH FLOW $229,121

  • Non-Medical Home Care: Payor mix of Medicare, Private and Insurance

     

    This home health company based in Nebraska had a 44% profit margin in 2021 with 5 office administrators and 43 caregivers on staff. This company has been operating for 30 years, but this location has been open since 2018 providing care to Local clients of all age ranges, not just the elderly like most competitors. This business works well with Medicare, long term Care Insurance and also offers private financing options. Services offered by the 43 caregivers on staff include Grooming and hygiene, transferring and positioning, conversation and companionship, light housekeeping, toileting and incontinence care, transportation, medication reminders, nutrition and meal prep, grocery shopping and other errands. This business has gained a great reputation due to the company’s excellent service. The current owner has offered 6 months of training and their responsibilities include general oversight which averages 15 hours a week. With a very low multiple of 2.75 and a $170,000 Fair Market Valuation discount due to the current owners need to move, this business is primed for new ownership.

     

    Priced at $715,000, a 25% down payment of $178,750 returns $166,224 on the first year! The assets included in the purchase are valued at $60,000 and this includes office furniture, computers, webcams, printers, and a vehicle. This reputable company continues to grow due to their willingness to go the extra mile for their clients and consistent referrals. They currently operate out of a modest office space with 5 offices and a low overhead. Growth opportunities include developing an established marketing plan, partnering with insurance companies to expand services, hiring a sales representative to further expand the client flow, and advancing current marketing tactics.

     

    PRICE $715,000 CASH FLOW $262,590

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Colorado Based Day Spa with 600 Active Memberships

     

    This Colorado based day spa boasts 600 active memberships. This business does not require medical licensing as they do not offer aesthetic medical treatments like Botox or liposuction. The services primarily consist of massages and skincare treatment with massages making up 60% of their scheduled services and skincare making a combined 40% including facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Located in Bolder County, Colorado, this franchise spa location is right in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! This business operates out of a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that is not at maximum capacity. With a team of 28 team members including 3 team leads, this business has an established chain of command. The current owner handles oversight of the team, but the team leads primarily interact with the employees on an everyday leadership base. She also reviews and finalizes financial decisions including payroll, closing the books, and finalizing orders from vendors. She has confidently posited that many of her responsibilities could be transitioned and delegated to her employees during the offered 3–6-month training period after sale. The current owners of this establishment have been dealing with some medical concerns and are looking to retire.

     

    Priced at $545,000 this franchise establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known location in a prime location with support from both the current owner and from the national franchise base making it the perfect opportunity for a first-time business owner. Not only does this business expect to see an increase in profit margin with an upcoming increase in pricing to take effect in November, but they have room to expand their services by diversifying their service area. 

    PRICE $545,000 CASH FLOW $117,627

  • Salons Suites with 44 Spaces: Absentee owned

    This absentee owned business offers small-scale spa-based business owners the opportunity to run their business out of a well trafficked location with amenities including well-maintained space, business partnership opportunities, educational workshops through the franchise, and a complimentary concierge service. This salon suite franchise business has a loyal and established tenant base including multiple customers that have been with the business since its origins in 2015. This business is fiercely focused on client services because they know that as the host of a multitude of businesses, their name is intertwined with all their customers’ branding. The location for this business is a 10,000 square feet facility in West Hartford, CT with 44 suites for different clients to utilize. The current owner is looking to sell due to recent health issues coming to light. He has a passive role in the business which includes checking in with tenants as preferred and he likes to purchase everyone lunch once a month. New ownership would not need to hire a replacement and could easily step into this role.

    This business is unique in its ability to not only provide business owners an opportunity to live their dream without worrying about the details of running a business, but also the sense of comradery it evokes in customers. This establishment has created a major networking opportunity for businesses and a community of likeminded individuals working to build their dreams. New ownership could expand this community in a few ways. The current location has 1,000 sq. ft. that has not been converted into suites but could be. A buyer could also utilize the excellent reputation and longstanding clients to expand into an additional location.

    Priced at $530,000, A 10% down payment of $53,000 returns $143,976 in the first year after debt payments! This unique business has little local competition and is the prime choice for new and returning clients alike. Often, customers that have left their location to work in a separate boutique have returned for the lowered overhead costs and responsibilities as well as the individuality and community offered.

    PRICE $530,000 CASH FLOW $222,697

  • Ambulance and Nursing Home Transportation with Hospital Contracts

     

    With a down payment of $400,000, a buyer will receive over $1.5Million in assets! These assets include a Working Capital valued at $250,000, 25 Vehicles, Medical equipment and the technology necessary for operation. This Ambulatory business has “first call” contracts with the majority of their client base which include Midwest based hospitals, nursing homes, assisted living centers, and the VA. This ambulatory has a large and diverse staff in order to cater to their referring and repeat client base in both the emergency and non-emergency service base. Their established staff includes 1 general manager, 2 division supervisors, 2 billing reps, 9 dispatchers, 13 medics, 31 EMTs, 6 drivers, and 2 mechanics. Their primary services include ambulance transportation (which makes up 80% of their services) as well as wheelchair accessible or specialty transport, event standby, and EMS education services. The current owners are looking to sell as one is looking to retire and the other is interested in developing a non-competing business endeavor and they have offered a transition/ training period of 6 months. They both believe their responsibilities could be absorbed by their general manager as this GM has handled their responsibilities in the past. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet combined garage and dispatch center. The new business owner would have the opportunity to either lease this facility from the current owner or purchase it outright in a separate transaction.

     

    Priced at $2,250,000, this business is primed to return new ownership high levels of financial and operational success. Growth opportunities for this business moving forward would include getting involved with insurance contracts to offer community paramedic services including home visits to decrease individuals with a high rate of repeatedly needing ambulance assistance. With a profit margin of 24% this business is not only a sound investment, but important to their community. This business provides lifesaving services in a way that makes a huge impact in their clients’ lives, and with the purchase of this business, you could take part in making a change.

    PRICE $2,250,000

  • Day Spa – Absentee Owner – Financing in place

     

    This establishment has over 800 active memberships with 3 different packages to choose from. In addition to the memberships, these services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. With over $1.4 million in gross revenue in 2021, this business is on the path of continual growth. The purchase of this franchised day spa has $100,000 of seller financing and $150,000 of seller escrow included in the asking price! A new owner would have all of the assets needed to continue on this uphill profit trend while maintaining the operation’s current passive ownership with the business’s established staff of 25+ including 1 Assistant Manager and 2 team leads that can run the day-to-day operations. Located in Des Moines area, this day spa has a wide array of services offered including massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, spa packages, men’s treatments, waking, lash application and more. This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties and new ownership will have the opportunity to continue expanding this client base by maintaining or building upon the current marketing strategies already in play.

     

    As with most spas and similar operations, this business was mandated to close their doors in 2020 for 2 months, yet still saw an increase in revenue and profit that year. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the year of 2022. Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and their ability to provide a real resort feel within their community.

     

    The attractive price of $905,000 would allow any type of buyer to consider this listing. No spa or business background necessary for purchase! This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

     

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $269,161

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Multi Location Urgent Care with niche focus in Physicals

    Buyer does not need to be a doctor; the owner is passive and lives over 2 hours away! Their team of 19 includes 1 Business Development Manager, 3 Providers (Nurse Practitioners), 3 Billing Reps, 10 Medical Assistants, and 2 X-Ray Techs. For over 15 years, this multi-location practice has been providing care for workers compensation accidents, treating on the job injuries, DOT physicals, drug testing, and pre-placement screening in Elkhart, Indiana. The business development manager has brought on 90 new clients since 2020! Their repeat client base is businesses and employers in the area. The current owner only works 10 hours/week via phone and he is still willing to stay on board to train and transition for 2 years after closing to ensure a smooth transaction. There is little to no competition in the area, outside of expensive hospitals. This practice does not have any hospital affiliations.

    A 3rd location is fully equipped and ready to open as soon as the staff is all trained. With the purchase, a buyer would be getting in receipt of 2 vehicles, medical equipment, office furnishings, and A/R. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner will carry or hold an equity roll of 12.5%. Boasting a profit margin of 50%, year over year growth, and over $1.5M in cash flow, the numbers speak for themselves! Priced at $7,050,000, this business is a passive opportunity with exponential growth opportunities requiring minimal additional resources to be expended.

    PRICE $7,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,680,388

Rentals/Transportation/Automotive (8)

  • Niche Rental Fleet of Directional Drills – Growth with Infrastructure Bill

    With a location in Phoenix, Arizona and in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to rent to Prime Contractors, foundation companies, and infrastructure GC’s throughout the Southwest. Over $4M in backlog and $3.6M in their sales pipeline, this Industrial drilling equipment business is on track to have an amazing 2023. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright. Established over 15 years ago, this wellknown business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. With nearly $8 Million in assets the buyers’ loan is 100% Collateralized! With the thought of a “recession” looming, this company will be growing, as the newly passed Infrastructure Bill will directly impact this company’s revenue and shield them from economic downfall. The team consists of industry experts including the COO/Sales manager, a Project and Operations Manager, Accounting and Sales Representative, Office Administrator, a Lead Mechanic plus his Technician, a Yard Manager and Technician Consultant. The current owner only spends 15 hours a week in the business with the role of general oversite and is offering up to a 2-year transition period.

    Priced at $9,975,000 this business is ready for new ownership to step in and enjoy continued growth. The current owner believes in the business’s onward & upward revenues and, as a show of this faith and to mitigate the risk for future ownership, the seller has offered to carry a 20% Seller note and/or Equity Roll. Opportunities for growth include expanding into the Mining Sector, Electrical Sector, International Market, Casing Manufacturing and Distributorships for other product lines. They could easily add 3-5 new product lines in a short amount of time. The newly signed Infrastructure bill will allow organic growth making this opportunity recession-proof.

    PRICE $9,975,000 CASH FLOW $2,075,675

  • Towing & Recovery, Auto Repairs in Northern Ontario

    Generating over $2M in annual revenue, with $1M virtually guaranteed from roadside services, this Ontario-based business has been established for over 20 years! Providing towing and recovery services for roadside companies, law enforcement agencies, municipal fleets, public vehicles, emergency vehicles, and local individuals, they also provide expert automotive repairs including brakes, steering, engine diagnostics, and heavy truck repairs. 72% of revenue is from towing services and 28% is from auto repair services.  The 18-person team includes 8 full-time drivers, 3 mechanics, 3 apprentices, an office manager, a dispatcher, a part-time bookkeeper, and a payroll clerk with most employees having 6+ years tenure. The current owner commissions for towing jobs and handles high-level management functions, he is not doing any of the labor or driving. The business is well positioned to dominate the market with opportunities to expand the towing business and expand geographically into the Soo area.

     

    There is over $500K worth of equipment with $192K capex that would be included in the sale. The roadside and auto repair divisions have created niche segments that help protect the work and a large moat has been created by tying up the larger roadside contracts within the district. This makes it hard for other companies to get a foot hold.

     

    In addition, the garage has the only heavy mechanic shop within 55 km and they have multiple light and heavy licenses. Most of their revenue comes from long-term contracts with roadside service companies and referrals from local law enforcement agencies.  The largest towing customer operates on negotiated three-year contracts and they have been a loyal customer for over 21 years. Their website and word-of-mouth advertising from loyal and long-standing clientele help them obtain new clients on a regular basis.

    PRICE $2,625,000 CASH FLOW $742,319

  • Ambulance and Nursing Home Transportation with Hospital Contracts

     

    With a down payment of $400,000, a buyer will receive over $1.5Million in assets! These assets include a Working Capital valued at $250,000, 25 Vehicles, Medical equipment and the technology necessary for operation. This Ambulatory business has “first call” contracts with the majority of their client base which include Midwest based hospitals, nursing homes, assisted living centers, and the VA. This ambulatory has a large and diverse staff in order to cater to their referring and repeat client base in both the emergency and non-emergency service base. Their established staff includes 1 general manager, 2 division supervisors, 2 billing reps, 9 dispatchers, 13 medics, 31 EMTs, 6 drivers, and 2 mechanics. Their primary services include ambulance transportation (which makes up 80% of their services) as well as wheelchair accessible or specialty transport, event standby, and EMS education services. The current owners are looking to sell as one is looking to retire and the other is interested in developing a non-competing business endeavor and they have offered a transition/ training period of 6 months. They both believe their responsibilities could be absorbed by their general manager as this GM has handled their responsibilities in the past. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet combined garage and dispatch center. The new business owner would have the opportunity to either lease this facility from the current owner or purchase it outright in a separate transaction.

     

    Priced at $2,250,000, this business is primed to return new ownership high levels of financial and operational success. Growth opportunities for this business moving forward would include getting involved with insurance contracts to offer community paramedic services including home visits to decrease individuals with a high rate of repeatedly needing ambulance assistance. With a profit margin of 24% this business is not only a sound investment, but important to their community. This business provides lifesaving services in a way that makes a huge impact in their clients’ lives, and with the purchase of this business, you could take part in making a change.

    PRICE $2,250,000

  • Refrigerated Food Transportation & Distribution with Consistently Reliable Demand

    This transportation and distribution business operates in an industry that is continually high in demand as they handle food products that require a refrigerated and/or climate-controlled environment. This consistency has led to the business seeing continual year over year growth in their gross sales, including in 2020 when many companies struggled to continue their operation. This company boasts an impressive 85% repeat customer base and over 30 years of experience in their industry. While they primarily handle food transportation, they also offer warehousing services which makes up 10% of their annual revenue. There is an abundance of space allotted for physical expansion in their 20,000 square foot facility – 18,800 sq. ft. of this space is for warehousing, with 1,200 sq. ft. being utilized as an office space. Having been extremely well established, this business has accumulated an excellent reputation and industry leading staff. Their team is made up of 28 employees: 3 team leads, 2 dispatchers, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, and 6 warehouse workers. This full team allows them to self-perform all of their deliveries and eliminates any need for outside contractors.

     

    The purchase of this business includes over $1.3M in assets, including nearly $700K in vehicles and equipment, along with $600K in working capital. The services provided are 100% B2B, serving food production companies all over the US.  Some of these clients have been around since shortly after the company’s inception in 1989!  Even with the heavy percentage of repeating clients, their annual revenue is widely distributed across several different clients, resulting in minimal customer concentration. They also consistently add new clients to the mix as well, allowing for year over year growth in revenue over the last several years. 

     

    While both owners do have some involvement in the business, both are committed to seeing the business continue successfully and would be willing to stay on for 1-3 years post-close.  During this time, they will train and transition the business to new ownership, while also finding and training any replacement needed. To further demonstrate their vested dedication in the ongoing success of this business, they are willing to offer a seller carry rate of 15%, which is above the industry standard of 10%.

     

    Priced at $3,415,000, this business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth to build on their current long-standing legacy.

     

    PRICE $3,415,000 CASH FLOW $854,730

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Trailer Manufacturing, Painting, & Maintenance

     

    The bank loan would be 100% collateralized from the included business assets with the purchase of this trailer manufacturing, painting & maintenance company. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. The average sale size is $52,500 per trailer; trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Priced at $435,000, opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request.

    PRICE $435,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

Selfcare/Childcare (11)

  • Non-Medical Home Health & Recession Resistant

     

     

    This home health business handles the non-medical care of clients across 5 different counties! This agency has more than 50 caregivers employed and a top leadership team of 3 managers that allow the seller to work a minimal 15 hours per week. Not only are the clients for this business diversified, they will need the care offered by this establishment regardless of the current economic status, meaning this business is essentially recession resistant. The client type for this in-home care company consists of people who require more assistance within their day-day activities. Seniors, respite patients, those with dementia, and veterans are their main focus. This companion care business recently received a contract with the VA in 2021, expanding their already diverse client base. Located in Omaha, NE, their service area currently includes the Omaha Metropolitan Area and surrounding cities, reaching as far as Fremont, Ralston, Bellevue, and Council Bluffs. Primarily these caregivers are in the homes of their clients, allowing this business to operate out of a 2,800 sq. ft. office space which in return keeps the overhead cost low. The current owner is selling due to deterring health unfortunately.

    Priced at $849,000, the current owner has offered 10% financing as a show of good faith in the continued success of the business after sale. This investment has exponential growth including further development the Fremont and Council Bluffs client bases, developing the newly awarded VA contract, and creating partnerships with workman’s compensation divisions. While each of these opportunities could provide significant growth with minimal additional investment, a buyer could also have the chance to enjoy their 18% profit margin if they wanted to be passive and not do anything to improve!

     

    PRICE $849,000 CASH FLOW $239,207

  • Endodontics Practice: Seller will Stay up to 3 Years

    The current owner of this endodontics practice has a desire to step away from the business aspects of the practice in order to exclusively focus on his passion of patient care.  He has not only offered to stay on as the primary endodontist for 2-3 years after the purchase, he also offered to carry 10% of the purchase price in order to show good faith in the direction and success of the business. Having been established over 50 years ago, this business is able to boast not only an excellent staff but also a stable and growing revenue thanks to their excellent and continual client pipeline and marketing strategies. With a staff consisting of 3 assistants, 2 front office staff members, and 2.5 DDS working in 4 fully furnished operatories, they are built to serve the entire Philadelphia area. This Endodontics practice is fully equipped to handle both surgical and non-surgical procedures and thanks to the variety of offered procedures they have developed an extremely diverse patient demographic. The business handles both pre- and post-procedure root canal work on all ages of clients and is equipped with the tools to cast same day fittings for the patient, which in return, provides the customer with a smile that they once lost due to aches and pains.

     

    Priced at $890,000, all prospective buyers regardless of background are welcome to inquire as the current owner is willing to do what is needed to ensure a smooth transaction. Included in the purchase of this business is $136,000 worth of equipment including the previously mentioned operatories along with microscopes and CPCT 3-D imaging machines. This practice has a great deal of growth opportunities, including an expansion of operations out into the Philadelphia suburbs as well as an increase of online presence and an increase in marketing in general. Just a 10% down payment of $89,000 returns $114,233 in the first year after debt payments—a 128% return on investment!

    PRICE $890,000 CASH FLOW $229,121

  • Non-Medical Home Care: Payor mix of Medicare, Private and Insurance

     

    This home health company based in Nebraska had a 44% profit margin in 2021 with 5 office administrators and 43 caregivers on staff. This company has been operating for 30 years, but this location has been open since 2018 providing care to Local clients of all age ranges, not just the elderly like most competitors. This business works well with Medicare, long term Care Insurance and also offers private financing options. Services offered by the 43 caregivers on staff include Grooming and hygiene, transferring and positioning, conversation and companionship, light housekeeping, toileting and incontinence care, transportation, medication reminders, nutrition and meal prep, grocery shopping and other errands. This business has gained a great reputation due to the company’s excellent service. The current owner has offered 6 months of training and their responsibilities include general oversight which averages 15 hours a week. With a very low multiple of 2.75 and a $170,000 Fair Market Valuation discount due to the current owners need to move, this business is primed for new ownership.

     

    Priced at $715,000, a 25% down payment of $178,750 returns $166,224 on the first year! The assets included in the purchase are valued at $60,000 and this includes office furniture, computers, webcams, printers, and a vehicle. This reputable company continues to grow due to their willingness to go the extra mile for their clients and consistent referrals. They currently operate out of a modest office space with 5 offices and a low overhead. Growth opportunities include developing an established marketing plan, partnering with insurance companies to expand services, hiring a sales representative to further expand the client flow, and advancing current marketing tactics.

     

    PRICE $715,000 CASH FLOW $262,590

  • Production Lab for Dental Implants

     

    The current owner of this dental implant production lab is willing to stay on with the business for 2 years after the sale, and their salary has been accounted for in the listed cash flow! This business is a stable investment into the dental industry and can be viewed as an essential economic need which is clearly shown in their continually growing revenue, even during the pandemic. This Omaha based business has been in service over 20 years and has a diverse list of services offered including designing and producing custom dental fixtures such as Implant Restorations, 3D Printing & Milling, Crowns, Custom Shades, Diagnostic Wax-Ups, Dentures, Metal Frame, Flexible Partials, Retainers, Veneers and many more. This full-service dental lab not only has all of the services that any doctor, dentist, or oral surgeon could nee, but also offers an experienced and efficient team including 6 technicians and 1 driver who collectively have a tenure of 3 or more years with the business! This is a business that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well.

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, most of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done. The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources and space in their 1,600 sq. ft. lab to bring this practice back now. These resources include over $250k in assets such as 3D printers, compressors, scanners, a delivery vehicle and more.

     

    At a purchase price of $945,000, a buyer can expect a $197,487 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team have resulted in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $945,000 CASH FLOW $360,154

  • Colorado Based Day Spa with 600 Active Memberships

     

    This Colorado based day spa boasts 600 active memberships. This business does not require medical licensing as they do not offer aesthetic medical treatments like Botox or liposuction. The services primarily consist of massages and skincare treatment with massages making up 60% of their scheduled services and skincare making a combined 40% including facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Located in Bolder County, Colorado, this franchise spa location is right in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! This business operates out of a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that is not at maximum capacity. With a team of 28 team members including 3 team leads, this business has an established chain of command. The current owner handles oversight of the team, but the team leads primarily interact with the employees on an everyday leadership base. She also reviews and finalizes financial decisions including payroll, closing the books, and finalizing orders from vendors. She has confidently posited that many of her responsibilities could be transitioned and delegated to her employees during the offered 3–6-month training period after sale. The current owners of this establishment have been dealing with some medical concerns and are looking to retire.

     

    Priced at $545,000 this franchise establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known location in a prime location with support from both the current owner and from the national franchise base making it the perfect opportunity for a first-time business owner. Not only does this business expect to see an increase in profit margin with an upcoming increase in pricing to take effect in November, but they have room to expand their services by diversifying their service area. 

    PRICE $545,000 CASH FLOW $117,627

  • Salons Suites with 44 Spaces: Absentee owned

    This absentee owned business offers small-scale spa-based business owners the opportunity to run their business out of a well trafficked location with amenities including well-maintained space, business partnership opportunities, educational workshops through the franchise, and a complimentary concierge service. This salon suite franchise business has a loyal and established tenant base including multiple customers that have been with the business since its origins in 2015. This business is fiercely focused on client services because they know that as the host of a multitude of businesses, their name is intertwined with all their customers’ branding. The location for this business is a 10,000 square feet facility in West Hartford, CT with 44 suites for different clients to utilize. The current owner is looking to sell due to recent health issues coming to light. He has a passive role in the business which includes checking in with tenants as preferred and he likes to purchase everyone lunch once a month. New ownership would not need to hire a replacement and could easily step into this role.

    This business is unique in its ability to not only provide business owners an opportunity to live their dream without worrying about the details of running a business, but also the sense of comradery it evokes in customers. This establishment has created a major networking opportunity for businesses and a community of likeminded individuals working to build their dreams. New ownership could expand this community in a few ways. The current location has 1,000 sq. ft. that has not been converted into suites but could be. A buyer could also utilize the excellent reputation and longstanding clients to expand into an additional location.

    Priced at $530,000, A 10% down payment of $53,000 returns $143,976 in the first year after debt payments! This unique business has little local competition and is the prime choice for new and returning clients alike. Often, customers that have left their location to work in a separate boutique have returned for the lowered overhead costs and responsibilities as well as the individuality and community offered.

    PRICE $530,000 CASH FLOW $222,697

  • Ambulance and Nursing Home Transportation with Hospital Contracts

     

    With a down payment of $400,000, a buyer will receive over $1.5Million in assets! These assets include a Working Capital valued at $250,000, 25 Vehicles, Medical equipment and the technology necessary for operation. This Ambulatory business has “first call” contracts with the majority of their client base which include Midwest based hospitals, nursing homes, assisted living centers, and the VA. This ambulatory has a large and diverse staff in order to cater to their referring and repeat client base in both the emergency and non-emergency service base. Their established staff includes 1 general manager, 2 division supervisors, 2 billing reps, 9 dispatchers, 13 medics, 31 EMTs, 6 drivers, and 2 mechanics. Their primary services include ambulance transportation (which makes up 80% of their services) as well as wheelchair accessible or specialty transport, event standby, and EMS education services. The current owners are looking to sell as one is looking to retire and the other is interested in developing a non-competing business endeavor and they have offered a transition/ training period of 6 months. They both believe their responsibilities could be absorbed by their general manager as this GM has handled their responsibilities in the past. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet combined garage and dispatch center. The new business owner would have the opportunity to either lease this facility from the current owner or purchase it outright in a separate transaction.

     

    Priced at $2,250,000, this business is primed to return new ownership high levels of financial and operational success. Growth opportunities for this business moving forward would include getting involved with insurance contracts to offer community paramedic services including home visits to decrease individuals with a high rate of repeatedly needing ambulance assistance. With a profit margin of 24% this business is not only a sound investment, but important to their community. This business provides lifesaving services in a way that makes a huge impact in their clients’ lives, and with the purchase of this business, you could take part in making a change.

    PRICE $2,250,000

  • Day Spa – Absentee Owner – Financing in place

     

    This establishment has over 800 active memberships with 3 different packages to choose from. In addition to the memberships, these services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. With over $1.4 million in gross revenue in 2021, this business is on the path of continual growth. The purchase of this franchised day spa has $100,000 of seller financing and $150,000 of seller escrow included in the asking price! A new owner would have all of the assets needed to continue on this uphill profit trend while maintaining the operation’s current passive ownership with the business’s established staff of 25+ including 1 Assistant Manager and 2 team leads that can run the day-to-day operations. Located in Des Moines area, this day spa has a wide array of services offered including massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, spa packages, men’s treatments, waking, lash application and more. This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties and new ownership will have the opportunity to continue expanding this client base by maintaining or building upon the current marketing strategies already in play.

     

    As with most spas and similar operations, this business was mandated to close their doors in 2020 for 2 months, yet still saw an increase in revenue and profit that year. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the year of 2022. Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and their ability to provide a real resort feel within their community.

     

    The attractive price of $905,000 would allow any type of buyer to consider this listing. No spa or business background necessary for purchase! This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

     

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $269,161

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Multi Location Urgent Care with niche focus in Physicals

    Buyer does not need to be a doctor; the owner is passive and lives over 2 hours away! Their team of 19 includes 1 Business Development Manager, 3 Providers (Nurse Practitioners), 3 Billing Reps, 10 Medical Assistants, and 2 X-Ray Techs. For over 15 years, this multi-location practice has been providing care for workers compensation accidents, treating on the job injuries, DOT physicals, drug testing, and pre-placement screening in Elkhart, Indiana. The business development manager has brought on 90 new clients since 2020! Their repeat client base is businesses and employers in the area. The current owner only works 10 hours/week via phone and he is still willing to stay on board to train and transition for 2 years after closing to ensure a smooth transaction. There is little to no competition in the area, outside of expensive hospitals. This practice does not have any hospital affiliations.

    A 3rd location is fully equipped and ready to open as soon as the staff is all trained. With the purchase, a buyer would be getting in receipt of 2 vehicles, medical equipment, office furnishings, and A/R. As a show of good faith and vested interest in the ongoing success of the company, the owner will carry or hold an equity roll of 12.5%. Boasting a profit margin of 50%, year over year growth, and over $1.5M in cash flow, the numbers speak for themselves! Priced at $7,050,000, this business is a passive opportunity with exponential growth opportunities requiring minimal additional resources to be expended.

    PRICE $7,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,680,388

  • Most Well Run Soft and Hard Landscaping Business with $10M in Revenue

     

    This company is stacked with 3 Divisional Managers, an entire administrative staff plus 20 crews consisting of 50 skilled laborers. This is not your typical landscape “Mom and Pop” type of business! The company has $4.7M in assets which makes the buyers bank loan 100% collateralized! They have 5 years of year-over-year growth and the trailing twelve months of sales is over 10 million with 3 million in committed contracts for 2023. Their hardscape services consisting of retaining walls & pavers makes up 40% of their revenue. The pool division is 35% which includes pool design, landscape and water features. The remaining 25% is in reoccurring weekly maintenance for HOA’s, and both residential and commercial clients. This division has 800+ high-end residential homeowners on their list and boasts a 98% retention rate! After more than 20 years in business unfortunately, the owner is selling to have more time to focus on some health concerns in his family. He has offered a transition period of 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transfer of ownership for both the buyer and his staff.

     

    The current owner has offered to carry or roll equity for up to 20% of this purchase to establish his ongoing vested interest in the success of the business and as a show of good faith. All of the certifications needed (licensed contractor, sprinkler contractors, lawn and paving certifications) are held by the business or current employees, not the owner. Priced at $6,800,000 this business has a solid team, client base, and local reputation that any entrepreneur could build with. There is absolutely no marketing in place, all business is based on reputation, and they also have much more capacity with their current location and fleet.

     

    PRICE $6,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,691,487

  • 90-Year-Old Established Appliance Retailer with Install Division

    This business is located in Iowa City and has clients throughout the many small towns within a 50-mile radius of the business. With services including the sales, installation, and servicing of appliances (1/3), HVAC (1/3), and electrical and plumbing (1/3) as well as an excellent local reputation and deep roots within their community, this business has been able to acquire a loyal and somewhat niche client base. There are 8 total staff members including 1 service lead and 2 service techs, 1 install lead and 1 install tech, two office managers, and 1 part-time delivery assistant, allowing the owner of this business to hold down a full-time job completely unrelated to this business for the past five years! The purchase of this business includes $280,000 in assets to allow new ownership to continue the ongoing success of this establishment. This means that not only does a 10% down payment of $49,000 offer new ownership a 172% return on investment with $84,408 being made in the first year after debt payments, but also a significant amount of assets! While there are a few other appliance stores in the area, very few offer installation and maintenance of these products.

     

    This business has ample room for growth in the service side of their industry. Due to their niche maintenance services, partnering with outside appliance sales businesses to offer appliance servicing could offer exponential growth. Not only does a buyer have the opportunity to rent the location this business is in from the current owner, they also have the opportunity to buy it now in a separate transaction, or in the future!

     

    Priced at $490,000, a buyer would be receiving an unmatched reputation as the only business in the area that can offer the customer service and hospitality that can only be offered by a small, Midwest based pillar of their community! The current owner is looking to sell the business in order to change industries and explore other non-competing interests moving forward. He has spent a lot of time building not only this business, but also his community and has extreme vested interest in the ongoing success of the business. As a show of good faith, he has offered 10% seller financing and will stay on board for 6 months-1 year post-close.

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $157,187

  • Luxury Black Car Service for Corporate Clients

     

    The company is located in Tampa and operates in about a 50-mile radius. The owner is ready to “turn over the keys” to the next owner so he can ease into retirement while he stays on board for 1 year during a transition period. This company’s primary clients are corporate/business travelers with prearranged car service to and from the airport. This makes up 70% of their revenue. An additional 15% comes from black car or limo service, which take professionals to and from meetings or are booked by a luxury hotel concierge service for their guests. The last 15% is from the school transport division, which takes students to field trips or after school activities. Included in the purchase of this business is 31 vehicles, including luxury sedans, luxury SUVs, executive vans, SUVs, minivan, passenger van valued at $332,000. Currently, the owner is only responsible for general oversight and handling AP, which the CSR Manager would be easily able to wrap into their current job responsibilities. The team consists of 1 Customer Service Manager, 1 Customer Service Rep, 1 Dispatch Manager, 1 Mechanic, and 40-50 contract drivers. Not everyone wants to use a ride share app such as Uber or Lyft, and before ride share, not all people wanted to use a taxi; which is why for more than 25 years, this high-end transportation and black car service business has withstood the test of time!

     

    This airport transportation service has the opportunity to double their revenue in Feb of 2023! A 5-year contract will be awarded from the Tampa Bay International Airport’s newly added terminal. This company is the #1 contender in winning out of 3 shuttle service businesses. There is also space to expand service into non-emergency medical transportation. With a low multiple of only 3.15 this is priced at $1,725,000. The owner is willing to carry 10% of the note, showing a vested interest in the ongoing success of the company.  In 2022 the Cashflow is over $665,000 boasting a 32% Profit Margin.

    PRICE $1,725,000 CASH FLOW $552,787

  • Colorado Based Day Spa with 600 Active Memberships

     

    This Colorado based day spa boasts 600 active memberships. This business does not require medical licensing as they do not offer aesthetic medical treatments like Botox or liposuction. The services primarily consist of massages and skincare treatment with massages making up 60% of their scheduled services and skincare making a combined 40% including facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Located in Bolder County, Colorado, this franchise spa location is right in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! This business operates out of a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that is not at maximum capacity. With a team of 28 team members including 3 team leads, this business has an established chain of command. The current owner handles oversight of the team, but the team leads primarily interact with the employees on an everyday leadership base. She also reviews and finalizes financial decisions including payroll, closing the books, and finalizing orders from vendors. She has confidently posited that many of her responsibilities could be transitioned and delegated to her employees during the offered 3–6-month training period after sale. The current owners of this establishment have been dealing with some medical concerns and are looking to retire.

     

    Priced at $545,000 this franchise establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known location in a prime location with support from both the current owner and from the national franchise base making it the perfect opportunity for a first-time business owner. Not only does this business expect to see an increase in profit margin with an upcoming increase in pricing to take effect in November, but they have room to expand their services by diversifying their service area. 

    PRICE $545,000 CASH FLOW $117,627

  • Ambulance and Nursing Home Transportation with Hospital Contracts

     

    With a down payment of $400,000, a buyer will receive over $1.5Million in assets! These assets include a Working Capital valued at $250,000, 25 Vehicles, Medical equipment and the technology necessary for operation. This Ambulatory business has “first call” contracts with the majority of their client base which include Midwest based hospitals, nursing homes, assisted living centers, and the VA. This ambulatory has a large and diverse staff in order to cater to their referring and repeat client base in both the emergency and non-emergency service base. Their established staff includes 1 general manager, 2 division supervisors, 2 billing reps, 9 dispatchers, 13 medics, 31 EMTs, 6 drivers, and 2 mechanics. Their primary services include ambulance transportation (which makes up 80% of their services) as well as wheelchair accessible or specialty transport, event standby, and EMS education services. The current owners are looking to sell as one is looking to retire and the other is interested in developing a non-competing business endeavor and they have offered a transition/ training period of 6 months. They both believe their responsibilities could be absorbed by their general manager as this GM has handled their responsibilities in the past. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet combined garage and dispatch center. The new business owner would have the opportunity to either lease this facility from the current owner or purchase it outright in a separate transaction.

     

    Priced at $2,250,000, this business is primed to return new ownership high levels of financial and operational success. Growth opportunities for this business moving forward would include getting involved with insurance contracts to offer community paramedic services including home visits to decrease individuals with a high rate of repeatedly needing ambulance assistance. With a profit margin of 24% this business is not only a sound investment, but important to their community. This business provides lifesaving services in a way that makes a huge impact in their clients’ lives, and with the purchase of this business, you could take part in making a change.

    PRICE $2,250,000

  • Day Spa – Absentee Owner – Financing in place

     

    This establishment has over 800 active memberships with 3 different packages to choose from. In addition to the memberships, these services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. With over $1.4 million in gross revenue in 2021, this business is on the path of continual growth. The purchase of this franchised day spa has $100,000 of seller financing and $150,000 of seller escrow included in the asking price! A new owner would have all of the assets needed to continue on this uphill profit trend while maintaining the operation’s current passive ownership with the business’s established staff of 25+ including 1 Assistant Manager and 2 team leads that can run the day-to-day operations. Located in Des Moines area, this day spa has a wide array of services offered including massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, spa packages, men’s treatments, waking, lash application and more. This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties and new ownership will have the opportunity to continue expanding this client base by maintaining or building upon the current marketing strategies already in play.

     

    As with most spas and similar operations, this business was mandated to close their doors in 2020 for 2 months, yet still saw an increase in revenue and profit that year. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the year of 2022. Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and their ability to provide a real resort feel within their community.

     

    The attractive price of $905,000 would allow any type of buyer to consider this listing. No spa or business background necessary for purchase! This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

     

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $269,161

  • Passive Commercial Surveillance Company

     

    This opportunity is perfect for someone looking for a passive business. The current owner of this well-established commercial surveillance company lives out of the country for 4-6 months each year and the new owner can expect to do the same after the training period. This company installs popular surveillance systems for businesses in the Northern California area. A new owner will benefit from multiple growth opportunities: this business has great potential to expand into the residential sector if desired or operate as-is and enjoy an excellent return on the low down payment of $27,500!

     

    They are increasing installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expanding to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.) and adding government and municipal contracts would be perfect opportunities for revenue growth.

     

    • They are well-known in Northern California
    • 80% of sales is in the San Francisco Bay area, 15% regionally, and 5% of their business is nationwide.
    • Highly experienced team with everyone on the team having a 4+ year tenure
    • Uses advanced tech like secure wireless camera networks, license plate capturing cameras and Point of Sale surveillance systems

    The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and lives out of the country 4 months out of the year. The team is standardizing their service contracts to include both remote support and hands-on support, with an obvious preference for services they can provide remotely. Their camera systems offer real-time surveillance and video monitoring to ensure real-time protection.

     

    PRICE $275,000 CASH FLOW $76,776

  • Large Client Base and Diversified Services at Central Iowa Irrigation Company

    This Iowa-based Irrigation Company boasts over 900 clients operating out of Des Moines. Services include irrigation systems installation and maintenance, backflow testing, and winterization. Five irrigation/service techs provide estimates and perform field work and installation. With a loyal client base, the next owner will benefit from a trusted reputation, an experienced team, simple growth opportunities through online marketing, and $254k in assets.

     

    Most residential installations take less than a day to complete, with commercial projects lasting around 2-7 days. As the techs are staff are greatly experienced (with two licensed for backflow testing), they can respond to 8-10 service calls per day, working in pairs. Ready and able to expand, many of the company’s clients have inquired about additional services that may be offered. These growth opportunities include a lawn care division, as well as providing landscaping services for their great number of clients.

     

    A website and Facebook are currently utilized, but as flow of business is generated through word-of-mouth, the strengthening of the online presence holds great potential (especially in conjunction with an expansion of services). Both owners provide general oversight for operations (splitting between office work and service/installation tasks). They are looking to pursue new non-competing ventures and are open to a sale of the client list to someone already in the industry.

     

    Priced at $438,000, a 10% down payment returns $77,997 in the first year after debt payments, making this an investment that you won’t want to miss out on!


    PRICE $489,000 CASH FLOW $139,952

  • Over 3,000 Firearms Sold Last Year: Includes $700,000 in Inventory

    Selling over 3,000 firearms last year, the seller is guaranteeing $700,000 in wholesale goods. The general manager of this company fully handles business operations, including online sales which allows the business to be passively owned. Their diverse outreach of customers includes local law enforcement agencies, first responders, military personnel, hunters, recreational shooters, people wanting to protect their home. Their inventory includes a wide variety of new and used firearms for sports, protection, and recreational use, plus ammunition, scopes, sites, holsters, safes, and more. With years of experience in the firearms industry, they are a full-service business offering services such as firearm sales, gun trading, gunsmithing & cleaning to prepare firearms for off-season storage, scope installation, night sight installation, total tear down, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks of firearms. The revenue, both online and in store, is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms and accessories. They operate a beautiful and large shop over 3,000 Sq. Ft. with a lot of storage space for secured inventory. Another incredible asset of the business is the well-trained and experienced team whom all have a long tenure within the company.

    Priced at $1,750,000, with a 4-year average cash flow of $565,940 and a low multiple of 3.1 plus the 50% collateralized loan with $800,000 in guaranteed assets this business is primed for new ownership. While this company already works with 3 distributors, there is an opportunity for growth if a new owner expands their portfolio and utilizes the 9 remaining distributors the company has already built relations with.

    PRICE $1,750,000 CASH FLOW $565,940

  • Online E-Commerce with 4,000 orders monthly

     

     

    This business is a Dropship E-Commerce Company with a 75% Repeat Clientele. This repeat client base focuses on materials that are used in medical offices, restaurants, offices and sanitation products. Providing over 400,000+ items, this business is able to drop ship anything pertaining to the industrial, janitorial, office, & restaurant markets as well as furniture and technology accessories. This E-Commerce business is currently fulfilling over 4,000 orders each month. This business has over 20 vendors, adding 2-3 new vendors each year. In addition to their success, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. This company is totally relocatable, with a small storage lease in Atlanta where return orders are processed. The owner currently lives in Tampa but has relocated to 3 different states over the course of the last 10 years proving that this business is truly relocatable. Their software, Channel Advisor, can manage up to 1 million SKUs allowing the new ownership significant room for growth. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and with the extremely efficient team of 7 cross-trained employees, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States.

    This company is priced at $4,850,000 and is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. Current ownership is confident in the continual success of this business and has offered a much larger than normal Promissory note and/or equity roll of 25% on this business and a training/transition period of one year or more if needed. The current owner is looking to sell this business due to health concerns as he Is preparing to undergo a back surgery.


    PRICE $4,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,238,004

  • Staffing Firm for Temp-to-Hire

    This staffing agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their diverse client base in the professional and clerical fields. This includes full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing and payrolling services. These services can be utilized for part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis, with a turnaround time of 2 weeks to 2 months. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. Located in Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

     

    Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Priced at $540,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts. 

    PRICE $540,000 CASH FLOW $135,530

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Kitchen & Bath Remodeling/Renovating – 27% Profit Margin

    The population is booming in this Western North Carolina region, keeping demand incredibly high for home remodeling & renovation projects! Boasting consistent profit margins over 20%, this company is projecting over $1.6M in sales in 2021. Using top-of-the-line Matterport 3D camera and software, which is extremely valuable in the restoration world, they are able to cut down on estimating time by 50%-60%. Established for 20 years, this business specializes in renovations, reconstruction, kitchen/bath remodels, and additions, with a client base consisting primarily of residential customers (90%).  The highly skilled team includes the owner, who handles sales, estimating, and client relations, as well as a Superintendent of Operations and Carpenter, with a loyal base of 18-20 go-to subcontractors. Based out of a leased 1,200 sq. ft. facility in Buncombe County, all business is done locally within a 1-hour radius of the warehouse. Assets include every piece of equipment necessary to take on a remodel project or custom home building, a fully-equipped box truck, Ford F-250, Ford F-550, and a 6x12 open trailer.

     

    They have a solid marketing strategy already in place, using an SEO campaign run by Wordjack Media through Facebook, Google Ads, and their own well-established website. The company prides itself on personal service, communication, attention to detail, and professionalism; their solid name and reputation leads to word-of-mouth referrals in the community.

     

    Construction workers have been deemed essential, and with the drop in interest rates for construction loans & home loans, this company has plenty of work on the horizon with no end in sight. Priced at $1,000,000, it would be an excellent roll-up opportunity for an existing restoration company because of the knowledge and skill already in place. The current owner will stay on for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition and to see all current projects in the pipeline completed. The largest growth opportunities are in branching out more into custom homes, spec homes, and insurance work. With the right capital behind the company, revenue could triple in the next 2 years. A 12.5% down payment of $125,000 returns $219,901 in the first year after debt payments – a 176% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,000,000 CASH FLOW $439,791

  • Full-Service Stone & Tile Restoration in Phoenix – 1,600+ Clients

    This stone & tile restoration company has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $620,000, a 10% down payment of $62,000 returns $106,494 in the first year after debt payments – a 172% return on investment!

    PRICE $620,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • 3,600 Sq. Ft. Pet Boarding & Training Facility

     

    With a 2,000 sq. ft. main building & 1,600 sq. ft. indoor training facility, this pet complex has a 30% profit margin and great potential for growth all within the fence line. The large facility has the capacity for 100 dogs for daycare. The dogs that stay in this facility can sleep, eat, and train all on the spacious property, playing and learning in the great outdoors. Daycare includes romps around the play field and sunbathing while training services feature obedience, scent work, puppy classes, as well as agility, rally, and more. Boarding is charged per night, while training is charged by the class. The owner currently oversees administrative tasks as well as acting as a lead trainer and will stay on board as a trainer if Buyer desires. 

     

    The complex features a 2,000 square foot main building that contains the office, grooming facility, and boarding areas. There is an additional 1,600 square foot indoor training facility for obedience classes.   The wide-open acres of the property allow the dogs to run, romp, and tussle in the sun and in the snow.  The space also allows for unique training opportunities such as agility and scent work.

     

    Priced at $449,000, a 10% down payment of $44,900 returns $86,965 in the first year after debt payments – a 194% return on investment! This business features an incredible location for the services that they offer.  Working to capitalize on the unique space as well as the incorporated training options could be an area of focus for growth.  Targeted advertising may get the company in front of new clients and engagement on social media may generate excitement.

     

    PRICE $449,000 CASH FLOW $148,927

  • 90-Year-Old Established Appliance Retailer with Install Division

    This business is located in Iowa City and has clients throughout the many small towns within a 50-mile radius of the business. With services including the sales, installation, and servicing of appliances (1/3), HVAC (1/3), and electrical and plumbing (1/3) as well as an excellent local reputation and deep roots within their community, this business has been able to acquire a loyal and somewhat niche client base. There are 8 total staff members including 1 service lead and 2 service techs, 1 install lead and 1 install tech, two office managers, and 1 part-time delivery assistant, allowing the owner of this business to hold down a full-time job completely unrelated to this business for the past five years! The purchase of this business includes $280,000 in assets to allow new ownership to continue the ongoing success of this establishment. This means that not only does a 10% down payment of $49,000 offer new ownership a 172% return on investment with $84,408 being made in the first year after debt payments, but also a significant amount of assets! While there are a few other appliance stores in the area, very few offer installation and maintenance of these products.

     

    This business has ample room for growth in the service side of their industry. Due to their niche maintenance services, partnering with outside appliance sales businesses to offer appliance servicing could offer exponential growth. Not only does a buyer have the opportunity to rent the location this business is in from the current owner, they also have the opportunity to buy it now in a separate transaction, or in the future!

     

    Priced at $490,000, a buyer would be receiving an unmatched reputation as the only business in the area that can offer the customer service and hospitality that can only be offered by a small, Midwest based pillar of their community! The current owner is looking to sell the business in order to change industries and explore other non-competing interests moving forward. He has spent a lot of time building not only this business, but also his community and has extreme vested interest in the ongoing success of the business. As a show of good faith, he has offered 10% seller financing and will stay on board for 6 months-1 year post-close.

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $157,187

  • Apparel Distributor with Manufacturing in Mexico

    Conservatively projecting to hit $17M in annual revenue, this company is primed for a buyer who can continue this growth pattern.  They pride themselves on what they call “Elevated Everyday Apparel,” which they design, oversee manufacturing, and then distribute to their clients.  The clients are highly reputable and recognizable, including Nordstroms, Burlington, PacSun, and as of last quarter, they are now rolling out Target!  The company has manufacturers in Mexico, Guatemala, and China and distribution throughout North America.  They have 10 of their own brands, over 50 licenses, and also do white label for retailers.  The team is well developed with 4 in management/office administration, 7 in art and design, 3 in sales, and 4 in production.

     

    The two owners spend about 25 hours each in the business per week, with Owner 1 overseeing the production and sales team, and Owner 2 working with the art department and merchandising.  One person could easily do both roles.  This replacement salary is accounted for in the cash flow.  As a show of good faith, they are willing to do a combination of promissory note and equity roll for 15%.  With a purchase price of $3,640,000 and a down payment of $364,000, you would see a return of $487,662 after debt payment, a 134% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,640,000 CASH FLOW $1,040,324

  • Trademarked Online Retail Business with Wholesale Partnerships

    This unique novelty retail business has over 1,500 established wholesale client partnerships! They carry a niche bathroom product focusing on molecularly battling unsavory smells leaving behind only the pleasant and masculine smell of a customer’s choosing. Finally, a trademarked brand focused on offering the guys an option they can be comfortable with. Obviously, the market was craving such an option as they have quickly wracked up business partners offering their product on shelves. There are currently three owners. All of these owners have full-time careers and consider this their “hobby” business. A new owner could easily run this business in less than 10 hours per week as they outsource production and only handle fulfillment. This business finds new clients and customers primarily via tradeshows and their website, where individual consumers can place an order. This business would offer a current male consumer focused enterprise an opportunity to expand products with a well-known brand and range of smells. It would also offer an individual owner the opportunity to run a part-time business with huge growth opportunities and the chance to unironically call your job crappy.

     

    While this business has excellent “mom and pop shop” representation across the United States, there are still multiple growth opportunities for new ownership. One would be focusing on stepping into the big box store realm, specifically focusing on gift shops and home good stores. Another could include expanding on current trade show schedules or building on existing partnerships to increase the wholesale side of business.

     

    This relocatable business, outsources all of its product manufacturing. This means that new ownership could be located anywhere and continue this business’s reputation for unique and manly products saving guys from choking on noxious bathroom gases and overbearingly floral facilities one fart joke at a time.

    PRICE $98,000

  • Day Spa – Absentee Owner – Financing in place

     

    This establishment has over 800 active memberships with 3 different packages to choose from. In addition to the memberships, these services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. With over $1.4 million in gross revenue in 2021, this business is on the path of continual growth. The purchase of this franchised day spa has $100,000 of seller financing and $150,000 of seller escrow included in the asking price! A new owner would have all of the assets needed to continue on this uphill profit trend while maintaining the operation’s current passive ownership with the business’s established staff of 25+ including 1 Assistant Manager and 2 team leads that can run the day-to-day operations. Located in Des Moines area, this day spa has a wide array of services offered including massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, spa packages, men’s treatments, waking, lash application and more. This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties and new ownership will have the opportunity to continue expanding this client base by maintaining or building upon the current marketing strategies already in play.

     

    As with most spas and similar operations, this business was mandated to close their doors in 2020 for 2 months, yet still saw an increase in revenue and profit that year. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the year of 2022. Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and their ability to provide a real resort feel within their community.

     

    The attractive price of $905,000 would allow any type of buyer to consider this listing. No spa or business background necessary for purchase! This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

     

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $269,161

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Full-Service Stone & Tile Restoration in Phoenix – 1,600+ Clients

    This stone & tile restoration company has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $620,000, a 10% down payment of $62,000 returns $106,494 in the first year after debt payments – a 172% return on investment!

    PRICE $620,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

  • Bar and Grill

    This Omaha Metro Area’s Newest Bar and Grill has really brought a fun and upbeat spot for many to relax and dine in.  The owner had more than 20 years of industry experience owning and operating other bars in which this location was established in November of 2008. Individuals enjoy delicious American food favorites with cold beverages from the bar and grill. This facility features a casual dining atmosphere with great food and drink selections.  It has also been a great attraction for many to watch the fine world of sports. 

    PRICE $210,000 CASH FLOW $72,000

  • Speciality Flooring

    PRICE $0

  • Sports & Playsets for Schools and Residential Outdoor Use

    Established in 1993, this extremely high-quality recreational equipment business is incredibly well known in the Omaha area. This business operates out of a 20,000 square feet facility. This delivery and installation of family fun sets service has no comparable competitors in their service area and as an authorized dealer, this establishment handles the sales, delivery, and installation of activity sets made for the whole family.  They are able to control the quality and timeliness of every instillation through their well-trained and experienced team. The business’s staff consists of 3 in store sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, 2 installers, 2 seasonal installers, and 2 subcontractors. The purchase of this business comes with over $700,000 of assets including equipment, vehicles, and inventory. A 12.5% down payment of $311,250 returns $595,646 allowing potential buyers the opportunity for a 193% return on investment in the first year after debt payments! Furthering the business’s reasonable expectancy for success is their gross revenue which was nearly $4 million for the trailing twelve months period!

     

    This commercial and residential sports and play sets business is relatively recession resistant. Recent years have shown that regardless of the economic climate, parents will manage to find ways to make their children feel special. Not only does this hands-on sales space allow parents to “try before you buy” it also acts as a space for hosting birthday parties and an indoor destination that is sure to please any child looking for fun on a rainy or snowy day. One of this business’s most effective marketing tactics includes hosting on-site birthday parties and free-play time. Due to this tactic, a large portion of their customer base has approached them through word-of-mouth recommendations which has led to an excellent profit margin of 19% and an annualized cash flow of $899,777 for 2022.

     

    Priced at $2,475,000, the current owner has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition. With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business, this opportunity is primed for new ownership to step in and build upon the growth pattern seen in recent years while benefiting from the day-to-day activities of bringing joy to children and their families that current ownership revels in. 

    PRICE $2,475,000 CASH FLOW $899,777

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

Franchise (4)

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • Colorado Based Day Spa with 600 Active Memberships

     

    This Colorado based day spa boasts 600 active memberships. This business does not require medical licensing as they do not offer aesthetic medical treatments like Botox or liposuction. The services primarily consist of massages and skincare treatment with massages making up 60% of their scheduled services and skincare making a combined 40% including facials, body treatments, spray tans, waxing, and more. Located in Bolder County, Colorado, this franchise spa location is right in the middle of a very accessible and busy area! This business operates out of a 3,000 square feet location with 11 treatment rooms that is not at maximum capacity. With a team of 28 team members including 3 team leads, this business has an established chain of command. The current owner handles oversight of the team, but the team leads primarily interact with the employees on an everyday leadership base. She also reviews and finalizes financial decisions including payroll, closing the books, and finalizing orders from vendors. She has confidently posited that many of her responsibilities could be transitioned and delegated to her employees during the offered 3–6-month training period after sale. The current owners of this establishment have been dealing with some medical concerns and are looking to retire.

     

    Priced at $545,000 this franchise establishment offers a buyer the opportunity to purchase a well-known location in a prime location with support from both the current owner and from the national franchise base making it the perfect opportunity for a first-time business owner. Not only does this business expect to see an increase in profit margin with an upcoming increase in pricing to take effect in November, but they have room to expand their services by diversifying their service area. 

    PRICE $545,000 CASH FLOW $117,627

  • 100% Delivery & Take Out – Omaha Pizza Franchise Location

     

    This Omaha pizza franchise location is currently 100% delivery & take out and is still seeing an increase in revenue through COVID! This location for sale has been in business since 1980, and under current ownership since 2006. There are around 21 employees, with FT Shift Leaders, and PT Kitchen Staff, Front Counter, and Delivery Drivers. All employees start at $11/hr., with Shift Leader pay at $18-18.50/hr. 80% of all employees are trained to full completion through the corporate online training. As the restaurant is franchised, a 5% portion of the revenue is paid out to the corporation, in addition to a small fee of $61/month for a customer loyalty program, in which a customer can earn free items as they accumulate points through the restaurant’s app. Their POS, Speedline, is fully integrated through Tillster, so the push of one button sets delivery in motion. Approximately 77% of the revenue is from dinner orders (after 4:00).

     

    Post-COVID, the restaurant has transitioned to be fully delivery and take-out based, with sales vastly improving over 2019. Currently, the dining area is still closed, and thus would be a perfect growth opportunity for a new owner, as the present dining area furniture was reupholstered during the COVID shutdown. Other key assets include two Middleby Marshall ovens, a make table, 60 qt. Hobart mixer, cooler, a Somerset dough sheeter, and POS systems. A great deal of local marketing is already done, with an advertising co-op being headed by local owners, and advertising partnerships done with local schools. The current owner provides general management and oversight for the location, opening the restaurant on Mondays and overall working 25-30 hours per week.

     

    Priced at just $535,000, a 15% down payment of $80,250 returns $88,861 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!  A new owner could certainly boost revenue by obtaining a liquor license and re-opening the dining room.

    PRICE $535,000 CASH FLOW $156,707

  • Award-Wiinning Eatery near Omaha

    This eatery very close to Omaha does not only have great-tasting food, but also happens to be in a location full of growth potential!! A new big-box department store has just been approved nearby along with a new street sign, leading to more traffic and MORE customers! This eatery has won “Best Of” in their current location. It has also already grown 24.1% since last year 

    PRICE $137,000 CASH FLOW $90,403

Thinking of Selling?
When selecting an M&A firm, please use the following Scorecard: click here for our M&A Scorecard

The Firm makes no warranties or representation in consideration to the information provided above. All communication regarding this business must occur directly with The Firm Advisors, LLC. The Firm is not a real estate brokerage and does not sell real estate. The Firm solely advises on exit strategy.